summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2005-12-29 00:34:36 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2005-12-29 00:34:36 +0000
commit41ceff5a615ab4e3d46b1c94bd26d9dcf9d6c1f8 (patch)
treec710ef0b82f65ae0f818e6ea8f10c2f40f2decf3 /Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html
parent2293d6885b754133151c14be7e01ad81baf0afbf (diff)
doc/english/i-l
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@21 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html47
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html189
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html59
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html98
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html95
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html58
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html82
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html45
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html39
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html62
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html70
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html68
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html55
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html44
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html88
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html40
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html328
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html44
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html68
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html34
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html46
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html52
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html50
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html45
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html37
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html48
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html95
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html62
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html52
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html65
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html88
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html42
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html37
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html35
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html14
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html19
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html16
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html18
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html39
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html17
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html96
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html41
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html116
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html75
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html72
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html58
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html90
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html79
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html76
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html54
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html107
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html25
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html47
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html60
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html49
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html78
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html43
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html111
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html78
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html22
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html20
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html23
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html40
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html102
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html87
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html125
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html27
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html53
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html90
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html21
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html26
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html30
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html24
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html83
246 files changed, 9140 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c6167c134fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/LaTeX-info.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>About Help On LaTeX</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">About Help on LaTeX</font></h1>
+
+<p>These files originated from Help on LaTeX, Version 1.01, 9 Feb 94,
+which can be accessed from the
+<a href="externals.html">"Other on-line LaTeX Information" Page</a>.
+That, in turn, was derived by Norm Walsh from a VMS help file provided
+by George Greenwade. </p>
+
+<p>The current files are a revised and extended version created by
+<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>.
+He added much information, especially about those parts of LaTeX
+he used most, equations and mathematical symbols. Whether or not
+commands are
+<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> has been added in most cases.
+Illustrative examples of usage have been added in several instances.
+The hypertext linking has been greatly improved.
+Each file contains a revision date.</p>
+
+<p>Much of the new information has been taken from Lamport, "A Document
+Preparation System:Latex," and from comp.text.tex newsgroup postings. </p>
+
+<p>Since the death of Dr. Green in December 1995, no substantial
+changes have been to these files. Relatively minor changes have
+been made affecting page formatting (HTML) of the files or
+as the result of verifying the external links.</p>
+
+<p>This set of files is also available as a
+<a href="ltx-tar.html">Unix compressed tar file</a>
+which can be installed locally to provide faster access.</p>
+
+<hr>
+Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a>.<br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>.<br>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Page revised: 1997:01:14, RBS
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..332a6425b99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/baselineskip.html
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \baselineskip and \baselinestretch</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\baselineskip \baselinestretch</font></h1>
+<tt>\baselineskip</tt> is a <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>
+which specifies the minimum space between the botton of two successive
+lines in a paragraph.
+Its value may be automatically reset by LaTeX, for example, by font changes
+in the text.
+The value used for an entire paragraph is the value
+in effect at the blank line or command which ends the paragraph unit.
+<p>
+<tt>\baselinestretch</tt> scales the value of <tt>\baselineskip</tt>. Its
+default value is 1.0 but it may be reset with a
+<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command. If one wants
+to change the spacing in a document one should reset <tt>\baselinestretch</tt>
+and <strong>not</strong> <tt>\baselineskip</tt> as the latter may be reset
+automatically by LaTeX to account for local variations in the text, but it
+is always scaled by the former. In principle, "double spacing" can be obtained
+by <tt>\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2}</tt>.
+
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..368f30f40eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/boldmath.html
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \boldmath</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\boldmath</font></h1>
+The <tt>\boldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches
+to a bold math italic font; this causes letters, numbers, and
+<strong>most</strong> symbols used in math mode to be set in a bold type.
+<p>
+(In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> <strong>everything</strong> in the
+formula is set in a bold font.)
+<p>
+The <tt>\unboldmath</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> switches
+back to the normal math italic font.
+<p>
+Note, these commands should <strong>not</strong> be used in math mode.
+Thus the scope of the <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> must
+include the math mode expressions to which you want it to apply.
+<p>
+If you
+want only part of a formula to be bold an
+<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command is useful:
+<pre>
+ <tt><a href="ltx-115.html#math">\(</a> Regular formula +
+ \mbox{\boldmath$ Bold part$} = 0 <a href="ltx-115.html#math">\)</a></tt>
+</pre>
+<p>
+Both <tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt> commands are
+<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
+<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a> and <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..357cdf7892a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/caption.html
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX caption</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\caption</font></h1>
+<tt>\caption[lst-entry]{Text of table caption}</tt> is used to
+generate a caption for a figure or a table.
+<p>
+the optional <tt>lst-entry</tt> may be used to generate an
+entry for a list of figures or tables.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..06631b5f7a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/declarations.html
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Declarations</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Declarations</font></h1>
+A declaration is a LaTeX command that does not act on an argument,
+but which changes the way LaTeX prints the following text or which changes
+the value or meaning of some <a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> or
+<a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>.
+
+<h2>Scope</h2>
+The <em>scope</em> of a declaration begins with the declaration
+command itself and is ended by the first right
+brace (<tt>}</tt>) or <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching
+left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration.
+However, the <tt>\begin{}</tt> and <tt>\end{}</tt> of environments
+you create yourself, for example, with the
+<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, do not
+count for calculating the scope of declarations.
+<p>
+The declaration is in effect within its scope, exept that it may be
+countermanded by another declaration whose scope is a subset.
+<p>
+However, some declarations are <em>global</em>; they are in effect until
+countermanded by another declaration. They include
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-271.html"><tt>\newcounter</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></a>
+</ul>
+<p>
+Every declaration has an <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a> of the
+same name. If <tt>\decl</tt> is a declaration command, then
+<pre> <tt>{\decl .... }</tt></pre>
+can also be effected by
+<pre> <tt>\begin{decl} .... \end{decl}</tt></pre>
+If the declaration takes arguments these become additional arguments of the
+<tt>\begin</tt> command.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b2110d115cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ellipses.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Ellipses</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Ellipses</font></h1>
+Ellipses (three dots) can be produced by the following commands
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> horizontally at bottom of line
+<li><a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a> horizontally center of line
+ (math mode only)
+<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> diagonal (math mode only)
+<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> vertical (math mode only)
+</ul>
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..66153686893
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/emph.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \emph</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\emph</font></h1>
+This is LaTeX2e.
+<p>
+The <tt>\emph</tt> command is considered more
+suitable for short stretches of emphasized text.
+Like the LaTeX 2.09 <a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> command
+it toggles between italics and Roman typefaces.
+A typical use would be
+<pre>
+ <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<address>
+<hr>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..10f0dea1611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ensuremath.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e \ensuremath</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ensuremath (<strong>LaTeX2e</strong>)</font></h1>
+<tt>\ensuremath{Text set in math mode}</tt>
+<p>
+The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command is always set in
+math mode, regardless of the current mode. Note that math mode
+is <strong>not</strong> specifically invoked in the argument of
+the <tt>\ensuremath</tt> command.
+<p>
+Thus <tt>\ensuremath{$\alpha^2+\beta^2$}</tt> is <strong>not
+correct</strong>.<br>
+The <strong>correct</strong> form is <tt>\ensuremath{\alpha^2+\beta^2}</tt>.
+<p>
+See also <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a>
+<hr>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d1cbde94b8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/externals.html
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Other On-line LaTeX Information</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Other on-line LaTeX information</font></h1>
+
+<hr>
+
+<h2>Prime Sources</h2>
+<dl>
+ <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tug.org/">TeX Users Group Home
+ Page</a></big></b>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+ <dt><b><big>The Comprehensive Tex Archive Network (CTAN)</big></b>
+ <dd>Virtually all TeX, LaTeX, and related software and documentation can
+ be obtained from CTAN, which has multiple ftp mirror sites.
+ See for example these
+ <a href="http://ctan.tug.org/ctan/">US</a> and
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+ <a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/">UK</a> sites.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+ <dt><b><big><a href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/ctan/latex/">LaTeX
+ home page</a></big></b>
+ <dd>Doesn't seem to have been updated since 1994.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+</dl>
+
+<hr>
+
+<H2>Packages for Publications</H2>
+<dl>
+ <dt><b><big>REVTeX</big></b>
+ <dd>The <a href="http://www.aip.org/">American Institute of Physics</a>
+ accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in
+ <a href="http://www.aip.org/aip/pubserv.html">REVTeX</a>.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+ <dt><b><big>AASTeX</big></b>
+ <dd>Similarly, the <a href="http://aas.org/">American Astronomical Society</a>
+ accepts manuscripts for several of its journals in
+ <a href="http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex/">AASTeX</a>.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+ The <a href="ftp://aas.org/pubs/aastex-misc/FAQ">AASTeX FAQ</a>
+ might be helpful.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+ Astronomers will also find
+ <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/software/TeX.html">TeX and LaTeX Macros
+ for astronomers</a> from STScI to be useful;
+ Particularly good is Chris Biemesderfer's
+ <a href="http://www.stsci.edu/ftp/software/tex/ltxcrib/">LaTeX
+ Command Summary</a>.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+ <dt><b><big>AMSTeX</big></b>
+ <dd>The <a href="http://www.ams.org/">American Mathematical Society</a>
+ has their own macro package,
+ <a href="http://www.ams.org/tex/home.html">AMSTeX</a>.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+</dl>
+
+
+
+
+
+<hr>
+
+<h2>More Resources and Links</h2>
+
+
+<p>The UK TeX Users' Group's
+<a href="http://www.cogs.susx.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?introduction=yes">FAQ
+Page</a> is searchable and up-to-date.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+
+<p><a href="http://www.emerson.emory.edu/services/latex/latex2e/latex2e_toc.html">LaTeXe help 1.4</a>
+is available from Emory Univ.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+
+<p><a href="http://www.cis.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/mn.html">TeX4ht:
+TeX and LaTeX for Hypertext</a>
+is available from Ohio State.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+
+<p><a href="http://www.am.qub.ac.uk/latex/latex_1.html">Hypertext information
+similar to the current set of files</a> also originated from VMS
+help files.</p>
+
+<p><a href="http://stkwww.fys.ruu.nl:8000/posters/hogeveen/recommend/astdoc.html">Aspects of publishing with TeX and LaTeX</a>
+is an introduction to the philosophy of TeX and LaTeX.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+<p><a href="http://club.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/LaTeX_intro.html">Text Processing Using LaTeX</a>
+from Cambridge Univ. Engineering Dept. includes excellent beginning
+and advanced hypertext manuals as well as information in other formats.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+<p>Macintosh users will want to take a look at Gary Gray's
+<a href="http://www.esm.psu.edu/mac-tex/">TeX/LaTeX Software for the
+Macintosh</a>, with pointers to many tools for dealing with LaTeX
+and what's new listings.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+<p>For those with less experience with LaTeX, good introductory material
+includes:</p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li><A href="http://riceinfo.rice.edu/Computer/Documents/Classes/Unix/class/class.html">
+ Intro to LaTeX</a>,
+ a short course at Rice University.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+ <li><a href="http://www.maths.tcd.ie/~dwilkins/LaTeXPrimer/Index.html">Getting
+ Started with LaTeX</a> by David Wilkins, Trinity College, Dublin.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+ <li><a href="http://zen.efs.mq.edu.au/doc/LatexTutorial/LatexTutorial.html">LaTeX Tutorial</a> from Macquarie University.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+ <li><a href="http://www.cs.stir.ac.uk/guides/latex/guide.html">Document
+ Preparation with LaTeX</a> from the Univ. of Sterling, UK.
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+</ul>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<p>The <a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/">(La)TeX navigator</a>
+from LORIA in France is an excellent source of documentation and pointers
+to other resources. The site is also in available in
+<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/english/index.html">English</a> and
+<a href="http://www.loria.fr/services/tex/german/index.html">Deutsch</a>.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+<p>Lots of
+<a href="http://www.cs.csubak.edu/Doc/Tex/welcome.html">documentation</a>,
+mostly PostScript, is available from King Lee at Cal State-Bakersfield.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+<p><a href="http://www.stat.ucla.edu/develop/tex/index.html">TeX
+and Friends</a>, from UCLA, is mostly (compressed) PostScript files.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+<p><a href="http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/TeXdoc/TeXdocs.html">Tex-related
+documents</a> from Cambridge Univ.; includes TeX Users Group newsletter
+and many documents (mostly in dvi format).</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-21 -->
+
+
+
+
+<p>The Usenet newsgroup
+<b><a href="news:comp.text.tex">comp.text.tex</a></b> can be a good
+source of information and help (but read the FAQ before posting).</p>
+
+<p>Of course, there's always
+<a href="http://www.yahoo.com/Computers_and_Internet/Desktop_Publishing/TeX/">Yahoo</a>.</p>
+ <!-- link verified 1998-05-14 -->
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<hr>
+
+Go back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Links verified: RBS, 1998-05-14, 05-21<br>
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1bc6a6108cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fonts2e.html
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX2e Font Selection</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Font Selection (LaTeX2e)</font></h1>
+The following methods for font selection may
+<strong>not</strong> be used in math mode.
+<p>
+Type styles are specified by three <em>independent</em> components. If
+a font (the combination of these three components) is chosen which is
+not available, LaTeX will issue a warning and substitute a similar font.
+<p>
+<ul>
+<li>series
+<li>family
+<li>shape
+</ul>
+These may be chosen by either a command so that the choice applies
+to the text within the command argument, or by a
+<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> which obeys the usual
+rules for scope. The two forms are
+<pre>
+ <strong>declaration</strong> <strong>command</strong>
+
+ \mdseries \textmd Medium Series
+ \bfseries \textbf Boldface Series
+
+ \rmfamily \textrm Roman Family
+ \sffamily \textsf Sans Serif Family
+ \ttfamily \texttt Typewrite Family
+
+ \upshape \textup Upright Shape
+ \itshape \textit Italic Shape
+ \slshape \textsl Slanted Shape
+ \scshape \textsc Small Caps Shape
+ \normalfont \textnormal Normal Style
+</pre>
+The <tt>\normalfont</tt> declaration sets series, family, and shape to
+the main text font of the document.
+<p>
+When using the Typewriter Family, words will be hyphenated only where
+permitted by a <tt><a href="ltx-182.html">\-</a></tt> command.
+<hr>
+See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br>
+See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5252c66ffa7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/fragile.html
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX fragile commands</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Fragile and Robust commands</font></h1>
+LaTeX commands are either <em>robust</em> or <em>fragile</em>. Fragile
+commands need special care <em>if they are part of a moving argument</em>.
+<p>
+Arguments to some LaTeX commands are called <em>moving arguments</em> because
+they may be "moved" to other places in the document. For example, the argument
+of <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning comands</a> may be moved
+to the <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a>. Other examples
+of moving arguments include:
+<ul>
+<li>arguments of <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> commands
+<li>terminal input and output, <a href="ltx-174.html"><tt>\typeout</tt></a>
+ and <a href="ltx-175.html"><tt>\typein</tt></a>
+<li>commands that <a href="ltx-264.html">produce page headings</a>
+<li>the <a href="ltx-91.html">Letter Environment</a>
+<li>the <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command
+<li> an <tt>@</tt> expression in the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a> or
+ <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> environment
+</ul>
+A fragile command that appears in a moving argument must be preceded by a
+<tt>\protect</tt> command. The <tt>\protect</tt> applies only to the
+immediately following command; if arguments of this command also contain
+fragile commands, the latter must be protected with their own <tt>\protect</tt>.
+
+<h2>Some fragile commands</h2>
+The following list is not exhaustive, but illustrates the kind of commands
+which are fragile
+<ul>
+<li>All commands that have an optional argument are fragile.
+<li>Environments delimited by <tt>\begin ... \end</tt> are fragile.
+<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Display math</a> environment delimited by
+ <tt>\[ ... \]</tt>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math environment</a> <tt>\( ... \)</tt>
+ <ul><li>However, <tt>$ ... $</tt> is robust</ul>
+<li>Line breaks, <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
+<li><a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> commands
+<li><a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> commands
+</ul>
+
+<h2>Some robust commands</h2>
+In general, commands which change <a href="ltx-176.html">Type face or
+Type style</a> are robust.
+<p>
+<a href="ltx-86.html">Length commands</a> are robust and should
+<strong>not</strong> be preceded by a <tt>\protect</tt> command. Nor
+should a <tt>\protect</tt> command be used in the argument to
+<a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> or
+<a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> command.
+<hr>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..222bd8b8452
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/frenchsp.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frenchspacing</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frenchspacing</font></h1>
+The <tt>\frenchspacing</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+tells LaTeX <strong>not</strong> to insert extra space at the end of
+sentences. This style is common in non-English languages.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cf271375d3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
+text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h1>
+
+<p>LaTeX is a word processing (or, more accurately, a typesetting)
+program. It typesets a file of text using the TeX program and
+the LaTeX Macro package for TeX. It does this by processing an
+input file containing the text of a document with interspersed
+commands that describe how the text should be formatted.</p>
+
+<p>Unike many word processing programs, which concentrate on formatting
+material on the page (often called WYSIWYG, for "what you see is what
+you get"), LaTeX concentrates on "content."
+LaTeX is a Generalized Mark-up Language macro package for the TeX
+typesetting program. That is, one specifies
+the structure: sections, title, appendix, authors' names, etc.,
+which bear little relation to how this will look on a page.
+That is determined by the
+<a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>
+files (*.sty);
+standard ones are provided for such things as articles, reports,
+books, and letters. However, these style files may be readily replaced
+by others, giving a completely different look.
+Of course, it is possible in LaTeX to specify much about
+the physical layout, but this tends
+to be done with commands that define things like space between lines or
+amount to indent paragraphs rather than by positioning each piece of text
+on the page as is typical in WYSIWYG systems.</p>
+
+<p>LaTeX produces
+as output a Device Independent (*.dvi) file that contains
+commands that can be translated into commands for a variety of output
+devices. It also produces a transcript or log (*.log) file
+that contains summary
+information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the
+input file and an auxiliary (*.aux) file which contains cross
+refererence information for Tables, citations, etc. It is sometimes
+necessary to run LaTeX twice so that it has correct cross reference
+information, especially when modifications have changed the numbering.</p>
+
+<p>These hypertext help files are meant to provide reference information
+for those with some familiarity with LaTeX. They are not an introduction
+or tutorial.</p>
+
+
+<dl>
+ <dt><big><b><a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></b></big>
+ <dd>Links to help by subject, LaTeX command, or environment
+ <p></p>
+
+ <dt><big><b><a href="versions.html">Notes on Versions</a></b></big>
+ <dd>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e
+ <p></p>
+
+ <dt><big><b><a href="refs.html">Reference Books</a></b></big>
+ <p></p>
+
+ <dt><big><b><a href="LaTeX-info.html">About these files</a></b></big>
+ <dd>Plus info on how to obtain them via ftp
+ <p></p>
+
+ <dt><big><b><a href="externals.html">LaTeX resources on the Web</a></b></big>
+ <dd>Including REVTeX, AMSTeX, and AASTeX
+ <p></p>
+
+ <dt><big><b><a href="mirror.html">Mirrors of this site</a></b></big>
+ <dd>Copies of these files which might provide faster access
+ <p></p>
+
+</ul>
+
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+
+<p>These pages were originally created by
+<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/staff/sgreen/">Sheldon Green</a>,
+who passed away in December 1995.
+Updates subsequent to Dr. Green's death have been made only for
+purposes of page formatting and link verification.
+Please contact
+<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a>
+if you are interested in assisting with maintenance and updates to
+these pages.</p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Updated: 1998-12-03, RBS
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4246ee64946
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/input.html
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Input to LaTeX</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Input to LaTeX</font></h1>
+Input to LaTeX is plain text (ascii) which includes both the text of the
+document and also formatting commands. It is possible to
+<a href="ltx-165.html">split the input</a> into several files using:
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a>
+</ul>
+<p>
+Space characters separate words. Two space characters in a row are
+equivalent to a single space character. The end of line is also
+equivalent to a space character. (However, a percent sign,
+<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a>, can end a line without
+generating a space character.) Generally, space characters at the beginning
+of a line are ignored.
+<p>
+An empty or blank line between two lines of text defines
+<a href="ltx-111.html">a new paragraph</a>.
+Two blank lines are equivalent to one.
+<h2>Special Characters</h2>
+The following ten characters are <a href="ltx-164.html">Special LaTeX
+Characters</a>:
+<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } ~ ^ \ </tt>
+</pre>
+If entered directly in the input they cause LaTeX to do something special.
+You can get the following seven of them into your document by simply
+preceding them with a backslash (<tt>\</tt>):
+<pre><tt> $ & % # _ { } </tt>
+</pre>
+To get the other three (<tt> ~ ^ \ </tt>) in
+your output requires <a href="ltx-164.html">more work</a>.
+
+<h2>LaTex Commands</h2>
+Commands take one of two forms
+<ul><li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character
+ <li>a bacslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters
+</ul>
+The second case is case-sensitive;
+<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from
+<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>.
+These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number,
+a punctuation mark or special character.
+<p>
+Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces
+(<tt>{}</tt>).
+They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets
+(<tt>[]</tt>).
+<p>
+For commands which produce text a trailing blank may be interpreted as the
+end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so
+ you may have to do something to create an
+<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text.
+
+<h2><a name="structure">Structure of Input</a></h2>
+LaTeX input normally begins with a
+<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. (In LaTeX2e
+this is replaced with a <a href="versions.html"><tt>\documentclass</tt></a>
+command.)
+<p>
+The beginning of the document text follows a <tt>\begin{document}</tt>
+command.
+<p>
+Input between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and <tt>\begin{document}</tt>
+is called the <em>preamble</em> and typically contains <a href="ltx-17.html">new
+command definitions</a>, information for the
+<a href="ltx-263.html">title</a>, <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a>
+which affect things like <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, etc.
+<p>
+The document text (and generally also the LaTeX input) is terminated by a
+<tt>\end{document}</tt> command.
+<p>
+It is possible to obtain some of the input from <a href="ltx-165.html">external
+files</a>, i.e., those which are not the main file input to the LaTeX program.
+<hr>
+See also
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the input</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..634cf6ae42f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/item.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \item</title>
+</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\item</font></h1>
+<tt>\item[label] Text for this item</tt>
+<p>
+The <tt>\item</tt> command starts a new item in a
+<a href="lists.html">List Environment</a>. The optional argument
+<tt>label</tt> generates the item label; if not given a default
+label is used.
+<p>
+A blank line preceding an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect.
+<p>
+In order to use brackets as part of the <tt>label</tt> (for example,
+in the <a href="ltx-31.html">Description Environment</a>) they must
+be enclosed in braces:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\item[{[}item 1{]}] This is the first item</tt>
+</pre>
+The <tt>\item</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>,
+ <a href="lists.html">Lists</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e0af56d138
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lefteqn.html
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \lefteqn</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\lefteqn</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ <tt>\lefteqn{eqn}</tt>
+</pre>
+ prints <tt>eqn</tt> in display math style, but pretends that it has
+ zero width. It is typicaly used within an
+ <a href="ltx-223.html"><tt>Eqnarray</tt></a> environment for
+ displaying long equations that require multiple lines.
+<p>
+A typical use might be
+<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{eqnarray}
+ \lefteqn{\int_0^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> some expression =} \\
+ & & some terms <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a>
+ & & <a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox{}</a> + more terms
+ \end{eqnarray}</tt>
+</pre>
+Note that the empty <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox{}</tt></a> is so LaTeX
+knows that the following <tt>+</tt> is a binary operator, and is not
+attached to the first of the "more terms" as a unary operator.
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4912c395d99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/lists.html
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lists</title>
+</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lists</font></h1>
+LaTeX provides several List-Making Environments
+These may be nested up to four deep.
+<p>
+
+<p>The items in the list are given by <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a>
+commands.
+A blank line before an <tt>\item</tt> command has no effect.
+
+<h2>List-Making Enviroments</h2>
+<DL>
+<dt><h3><a href="ltx-31.html">Description</a></h3>
+<dd>Typically used for giving short definitions or descriptions; the
+<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
+generally giving the term being described (although it <strong>can</strong>
+be left blank, it will look strange). The text of the
+<a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command is indented.
+
+<dt><h3><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a></h3>
+<dd>Typically used for numbered lists.
+<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a> for these lists are
+provided by <tt>enumi, emumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt>, respectively, for the four
+levels of nesting.
+
+<dt><h3><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize</a></h3>
+<dd>Typically used for unnumbered lists. The default
+<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
+produces "tick-marks" which vary by level of nesting, generally
+"bullets" for the first level.
+
+<dt><h3><a href="ltx-260.html">List</a></h3>
+<dd>Produces a list of labeled items and has required arguments that
+allow a great deal of flexibility in layout. It is generally used
+to define new environments with the
+<a href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></a> command, or to
+set up one-of-a-kind lists.
+
+<dt><h3><a href="trivlist.html">Trivlist</a></h3>
+<dd>Like the List Environment, using the currently defined values of
+list-making parameters; normally used to define an environment with a
+single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
+as part of the environment definition.
+
+</DL>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>,
+<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..56c6c8bb6be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-111.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Making Paragraphs</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Making Paragraphs</font></h1>
+<p>
+ A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines -- lines
+ not containing even a <a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (comments).
+ A blank line should not appear where a new
+ paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument
+ of a sectioning command.
+
+<H2>Subtopics</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-247.html">\indent</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-293.html">\par</A>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..539ef71c2a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-115.html
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Formulas</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Formulas</font></h1>
+<p>
+ There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+<ul><li><a href="#math">math</a> (see below)
+ <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>
+</ul>
+ All four of these environments are typeset in math
+ <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a>, using a math italic font and LaTeX
+ ideas about spacing in math mode. (See also <a href="mathfonts.html">math
+ fonts and styles</a>.)
+<p>
+ The math environment is for formulas that
+ appear right in the text. The displaymath, eqnarray, and equation
+ environments are for formulas that apppear on their own line(s).
+ The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but
+ displaymath, eqnarray, and equation environments can be used only
+ in paragraph mode.
+
+<h2><a name="math">Math environment</a></h2>
+ The math environment may be specified, as with all environments, by
+<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{math} math equation \end{math}</tt>
+</pre>
+ However, it is used so often that it has two equivalent shorter forms:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\( math equation \)</tt>
+</pre>
+or just
+<pre>
+ <tt>$ math equation $</tt>
+</pre>
+In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> one can also use
+<pre>
+ <tt><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a>{math equation}</tt>
+</pre>
+<p>
+For example,
+<a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and
+<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> can only be used in math
+mode. To include these in running text one could use:
+<pre>
+ <tt>The formula for water is H$_2$O.
+ If the hypotenuse is $c$, then $c^2=a^2+b^2$.</tt>
+</pre>
+Note that it is standard to use math mode for letters, such as the
+the <tt>$c$</tt> above, which are math variables.
+<hr>
+<h2>Related topics</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
+<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and
+ <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a>
+<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
+<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font
+<li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> for generating built-up fractions
+<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> for putting things above
+ each other
+<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> for square (and nth) roots
+</ul>
+<p>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..761ec951f03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-117.html
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Symbols</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Symbols</font></h1>
+<p>
+ TeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
+<p>
+ Some, like <tt>+ - = &lt; &gt; | </tt> are obtained from the keyboard (the
+ first three can be used in any mode; the last three only in math mode).
+<p>
+ Others are generated by LaTeX commands and
+ can generally be used only in math mode.
+ The following describe some of the useful symbols
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-401.html#math">Accents</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> (parenthesis-like objects; math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a> (sin, cos, log, ... ; math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a> (sums, integrals, ...
+ ; math mode)
+<p>
+ <li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a>
+<p>
+ <li><a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a> generates fractions (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> generates n-th root symbol
+ (math mode)
+ <li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> places one item above
+ another (math mode)
+<p>
+ <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> for a bold math font
+</ul>
+
+<hr>
+See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bd64652c6ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-118.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Spacing in Math Mode</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spacing in Math Mode</font></h1>
+<p>
+ In a math environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in
+ the spacing that it thinks is best. LaTeX formats mathematics the way
+ it's done in mathematics texts. If you want different spacing, LaTeX
+ provides the following four commands for use in math mode:
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> - a thick space
+<li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> - a medium space
+<li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> - a thin space
+<li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> - a negative thin space
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9e0fb80d330
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-119.html
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Math Miscellany</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math Miscellany</font></h1>
+
+The math symbols <tt>&lt; &gt;</tt> and <tt>|</tt> are used only in math mode.
+Note that left and right angle brackets (which are somewhat taller than
+&lt; and &gt;) can be obtained with
+<a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\langle</tt> and <tt>\rangle</tt></a> commands.
+<p>
+The single right quotation mark, <tt>'</tt>, produces a prime in math mode.
+You can also use <a href="ltx-407.html"><tt>\prime</tt></a>.
+
+<H2>Also see</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> font
+<li><A href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></A> (centered ellipsis)
+<li><A href="ltx-218.html"><tt>\ddots</tt></A> (diagonal ellipsis)
+<li><A href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-256.html"><tt>\ldots</tt></A> (ellipsis)
+<li><A href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></A>
+<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> putting
+ things above other things
+<li><A href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-340.html"><tt>\vdots</tt></A> (vertical ellipsis)
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>,
+ <a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..75e5148ba52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-13.html
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Cross References</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Cross References</font></h1>
+<p>
+ One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
+ the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details."
+
+<H2>Sections, Equations, Tables, etc.</H2>
+One can generate numbered references to anything for which LaTeX
+maintains a <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> by placing a
+<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command
+with some mnemonic name in the appropriate
+<a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>. The reference is then generated
+by use of the <A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A> command with the
+same mnemonic.
+<p>
+For example
+<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{equation}
+ <A href="ltx-252.html">\label</a>{eqno1}
+ c <a href="ltx-404.html">\geq</a> <a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a>{a^2+b^2+1}
+ \end{equation}
+ .... intervening text ...
+ From Eq.~(<A href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a>{eqno1}) we see ...</tt>
+</pre>
+Assuming that this is the first equation,
+the last line will produce "From Eq. (1) we see ..." Note the
+use of the <a href="ltx-143.html"><tt>~</tt></a>
+to ensure that there is no line break between "Eq." and "(1)."
+Also note that the <tt>\ref</tt> command produces only the number;
+if you want the number to be in parentheses (as shown here) you have
+to include them in your text.
+
+<h2>Bibliographic citations</h2>
+Bibliographic citations work somewhat differently. The following
+should be consulted:
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></A>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibligraphy</tt></a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d6a99f89d07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-130.html
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Modes</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Modes</font></h1>
+<p>
+ When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
+ modes:
+<ul>
+ <li><I>Paragraph</I> mode
+ <li><I>Math</I> mode
+ <li><I>Left-to-right</I> mode, called LR mode for short
+</ul>
+
+ LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
+ different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
+ Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or
+ when LaTeX is processing the argument of certain text-producing
+ commands.
+<h2>Paragraph mode</h2>
+ Paragraph mode is the most common; it's the one LaTeX is in when
+ processing ordinary text. In that mode, LaTeX breaks your text into
+ lines and breaks the lines into pages.
+<p>
+ There
+ are also several text-producing commands and environments for making a
+ box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box made by one of these
+ commands or environments will be called a
+ <a href="ltx-294.html">parbox</a>. When LaTeX is in
+ paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in inner paragraph
+ mode. The normal paragraph mode, in which LaTeX starts out, is called
+ outer paragraph mode.
+
+<h2>Math mode</h2>
+ LaTeX is in math mode when it's generating a mathematical formula. It is
+ in math mode in the <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>, <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>,
+ and <a href="ltx-223.html"> eqnarray</a> environments.
+<p>
+ In math mode letters are assumed to be math symbols and spaced accordingly.
+ Spaces in the input are ignored, except that spaces may be needed to
+ delineate the end of commands.
+
+<h2>LR mode</h2>
+ In LR mode, as in paragraph
+ mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
+ words with spaces between them. In LR mode, unlike paragraph and math modes,
+ spaces are not ignored; an input space creates an output space.
+ However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX
+ keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.
+ Even if you put a hundred words into an
+ <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, LaTeX would keep
+ typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then
+ complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
+<p>
+ LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an
+ <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command.
+ You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for example,
+ you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box.
+<hr>
+Also see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..70e27e88524
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-131.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Page Styles</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Page Styles</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\documentstyle</tt> command determines the size and position of the
+ page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
+
+<H2>Subtopics</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-137.html"><tt>\pagenumbering</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-140.html"><tt>\thispagestyle</tt></A>
+<li><a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..59134f72b88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-137.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagenumbering</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagenumbering</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\pagenumbering{num_style}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ Specifies the style of page numbers. Possible values of num_style are:
+<p>
+
+<ul>
+<li><TT>arabic</TT> Arabic numerals
+<li><TT>roman</TT> Lowercase roman numerals
+<li><TT>Roman</TT> Uppercase roman numerals
+<li><TT>alph</TT> Lowercase letters
+<li><TT>Alph</TT> Uppercase letters
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br>
+For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+To refer to a page number in the text, see
+ <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cd6fd4b67c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-138.html
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagestyle</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagestyle</font></h1>
+ <tt>\pagestyle{option}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\pagestyle</tt> <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+ changes the style from the current page on
+ throughout the remainder of your document.
+<p>
+ The valid options are:
+<ul>
+<li><TT>plain</TT> Just a plain page number.
+<li><TT>empty</TT> Produces empty heads and feet - no page numbers.
+<li><TT>headings</TT> Puts running headings on each page. The document
+ style specifies what goes in the headings.
+<li><TT>myheadings</TT> You specify what is to go in the heading with the
+ <tt>\markboth</tt> or the <tt>\markright</tt> commands.
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also
+<A href="ltx-264.html"><tt>\markboth</tt> and
+ <tt>\markright</tt></A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14882e118a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-140.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thispagestyle</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thispagestyle</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\thispagestyle{option}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\thispagestyle</tt> command works in the same manner as the
+ <a href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></a>
+ command except that it changes the style for the current page only.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..41f2a04db26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-141.html
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sectioning</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sectioning</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into
+ units. The <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> determines which
+ sectioning commands are supported. They should be used with the
+ following heirarchy:
+ <ul>
+ <li><tt>\part</tt>
+ <li><tt>\chapter</tt> (report style only)
+ <li><tt>\section</tt>
+ <li><tt>\subsection</tt>
+ <li><tt>\subsubsection</tt>
+ <li><tt>\paragraph</tt>
+ <li><tt>\subparagraph</tt>
+ <li><tt>\subsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only)
+ <li><tt>\subsubsubparagraph</tt> (milstd and book-form styles only)
+ </ul>
+<p>
+ The <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> for each level is reset when the
+ level above is incremented (except chapters are numbered sequentially
+ regardless of the part).
+<p>
+ All sectioning commands take the same general form:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\chapter[optional]{title}</tt>
+ <a href="ltx-252.html">\label{lab}</a> <a href="ltx-434.html">%</a> optional, for cross referencing
+ text for this unit ...
+ ...
+</pre>
+ In addition to providing the heading in the text, the mandatory
+ argument of the sectioning command can appear in two other places:
+<ol>
+ <li>the table of contents
+ <li>the running head at the top of the page
+</ol>
+ You may not want the same thing to appear in these other two places as
+ appears in the text heading. To handle this situation, the sectioning
+ commands have an optional argument that provides the text for these
+ other two purposes.
+<p>
+The <tt>title</tt> or <tt>optional</tt> title are moving arguments so
+<a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> commands contained in these
+arguments must be protected.
+<p>
+ All the sectioning commands have *-forms that print a title, but do not
+ print a number with the title and do not incement the relevant
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> and do not make an entry in the
+ <a href="toc.html">table of contents</a>.
+<p>
+ A blank line before or after a sectioning command has no effect.
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a>
+<li><A href="ltx-142.html"><tt>\appendix</tt></A>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a><br>
+See also <a href="toc.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
+Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..843f696d7c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-142.html
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1>
+ <tt>\appendix</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered.
+ It generates no text. However, <a href="ltx-141.html">section commands</a>
+ after the <tt>\appendix</tt> command are numbered accordingly.
+
+<hr>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..12207070528
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-143.html
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Help On LaTeX Spaces and Boxes</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Spaces and Boxes</font></h1>
+
+<h2>"Visible" Spaces</h2>
+You can generate a "visible" space, generally indicated as a small, squat
+"u," and useful in didactic material by using the
+<a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> command or the
+<a href="ltx-79.html"><tt>verbatim</tt></a> environment.
+
+<h2>Non-breaking Spaces</h2>
+To generate a space where you do not want to allow a break for a new line use a
+<tt>~</tt>. For example,
+<pre>
+ <tt>... in Table~2 and Fig.~3 ...</tt>
+</pre>
+
+<h2>Controlling Space in Text</h2>
+
+The ends of words and sentences are marked
+in the input by one or more spaces. LaTeX
+treats multiple spaces as if they were a single space. An end of line
+is also equivalent to a space; however, you can end a line
+<em>without</em> a space by using a
+<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> (anything following the
+<tt>%</tt> is considered to be
+a comment). LaTeX generally ignores spaces at the beginning of lines.
+<p>
+Paragraphs are
+delineated by a <em>blank line</em> -- one which does not contain even
+comments (anything following a
+<a href="ltx-434.html"><tt>%</tt></a> until the end of a line is
+a comment). See also the <a href="ltx-293.html"><tt>\par</tt></a>
+command.
+<p>
+LaTeX leaves extra space after punctuation, such as the period which
+ends a sentence,
+but, it uses a very simple rule (periods end sentences unless
+they follow a capital letter) so
+sometimes it needs a little help in determining when
+this is required. (However, see
+<a href="frenchsp.html"><tt>\frenchspacing</tt></a>.)
+Use
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> to create an ordinary
+ interword space
+<li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> before punctuation to force an "end of
+ sentence" space
+</ul>
+<p>
+It is sometimes necessary to add a little additional space, such as between
+consecutive single and double <a href="ltx-433.html">quotation marks</a>.
+The <a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> command can be used for this purpose.
+<p>
+Also see
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a>
+<li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</a>
+</ul>
+
+<h2>Spaces after Commands</h2>
+
+Most LaTeX commands consist of a <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of
+letters. The end of such commands is indicated by a nonletter, i.e.,
+a number, a punctuation mark, a space, or the end of the line. If the
+command produces text and you want a space to follow this text, you cannot
+just leave a space after the command; that space is treated as the
+end-of-command signal and several spaces are equivalent to one in LaTeX.
+To generate a space after a text-producing command you can use
+<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a>.
+<p>
+For example
+<pre>
+ <tt>I wrote this on <a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a> .</tt>
+</pre>
+generates "I wrote this on Jul 7, 1995." Note that the spaces
+between <tt>\today</tt> and the period in the input do not generate
+any space in the output. On the other hand,
+<pre>
+ <tt>\today\ was a good day.</tt>
+</pre>
+or
+<pre>
+ <tt>\today \ was a good day.</tt>
+</pre>
+will both produce "Jul 7, 1995 was a good day." The
+<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a>
+here is necessary to produce space between the date and "was."
+<p>
+An alternatative is to use braces to terminate the command. For
+example, <tt>\today{} was ...</tt> is equivalent to the above.
+
+<h3>Invisible commands</h3>
+Some commands do not produce any output text. LaTeX treats these as
+words of zero length and may try to leave spaces both before and
+after this "word" which will generally produce an undesirable gap.
+This can be avoided by attaching these commands directly to the
+preceding word, i.e., leaving no spaces.
+
+<H2>Some commands which create or manipulate space</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-306.html">\rule</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</A>
+</ul>
+See also
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-118.html">spacing in math mode</a>
+</ul>
+
+<h2>Boxes</h2>
+A box is an object which TeX treats as a single character; it is therefore
+not broken across lines or pages.
+<p>
+The following commands create or manipulate boxes
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</A>
+</ul>
+
+<hr>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..342a3e4219d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-164.html
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Special Characters</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Special Characters</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
+ special printing characters, or simply special characters.
+<pre>
+ # $ % & ~ _ ^ <tt>\</tt> { }
+</pre>
+ Whenever you put one of these special characters into your file, you
+ are doing something special, as described below.
+<p>
+ If you simply want the character to be
+ printed just as any other letter, include a <tt>\</tt> in front of the
+ character. For example, <tt>\$</tt> will produce $ in your output.
+<br>
+ Exceptions to this rule:
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\</tt> itself because
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> has its own
+ special meaning. Use <tt>$\backslash$</tt>.
+<li><tt>~</tt> and <tt>^</tt> because <tt>\~</tt> and <tt>\^</tt> produce
+ <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a>. Use
+ <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the
+ <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>.
+
+</ul>
+<h2>#</h2>
+The number (pound) sign is used to define use of arguments, for example,
+in the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> command.
+<h2>$</h2>
+The dollar sign is used to delineate <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> and
+<a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a> Enviroments.
+<h2>%</h2>
+The percent sign is used to insert <a href="ltx-434.html">Comments</a> in the
+input file, and to allow line breaks without generating a space.
+<h2>&amp;</h2>
+The ampersand is used to separate items in the <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>
+and <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> Enviroments.
+<h2>~</h2>
+The tilde generates a <a href="ltx-143.html">nonbreaking space</a>
+To create a tilde in the output, use
+ <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the
+ <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a> (or cheat by using
+ <tt>\~{}</tt>, i.e., placing a
+ <a href="ltx-401.html">tilde accent</a> over a "blank" letter).
+<h2>_</h2>
+The underscore is used to create <a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a>
+<h2>^</h2>The carat (circumflex) symbol generates
+<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>.
+ To create a carat in the output
+ use <a href="ltx-342.html"><tt>\verb</tt></a> or the
+ <a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim environment</a>.
+<h2>\ , { , and }</h2>
+The backslash and braces are used in
+<a href="ltx-17.html">command</a> definitions, for enclosing
+command arguments, and for delimiting scopes of
+<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0acce481a0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-165.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Splitting the Input</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Splitting the Input</font></h1>
+ A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the
+ whole input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it
+ into several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you
+ use, there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you
+ type when you run LaTeX.
+
+<H2>Subtopics</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-245.html">\include</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-248.html">\input</A>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bfcf7224ec0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-169.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Starting and Ending</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Starting and Ending</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Your input file must contain the following commands as a minimum.
+<pre><tt>
+ <a href="ltx-22.html">\documentstyle{style}</a>
+ \begin{document}
+ ... your text goes here ...
+ \end{document}
+</tt></pre>
+ where the <tt>style</tt> selected is one the valid styles for LaTeX; see
+ <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a>.
+<p>
+ You may include other LaTeX commands between the <tt>\documentstyle</tt> and
+ the <tt>\begin{document}</tt> commands.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..54755ef470a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-17.html
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTex Commands</font></h1>
+
+<p>Commands take one of two forms:</p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a single special character
+ <li>a backslash (<tt>\</tt>) followed by a string of letters
+</ul>
+
+<p>The second case is case-sensitive;
+<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\Gamma</tt></a> is different from
+<a href="ltx-405.html"><tt>\gamma</tt></a>.
+These commands are terminated by a nonletter, i.e., a blank, a number,
+a punctuation mark or special character. </p>
+
+<p>For commands which produce text a trailing blank is interpreted as the
+end of the command, which does not automatically create a space, so
+you may have to do something to create an
+<a href="ltx-431.html">interword space</a> after this text.</p>
+
+<p>Commands may have mandatory arguments, which are input in braces
+(<tt>{}</tt>).
+They may also have optional arguments, which are input in square brackets
+(<tt>[]</tt>).</p>
+
+<H2>Defining new commands, etc.</H2>
+
+<p>See: </p>
+
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-19.html"><tt>\newenvironment</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-20.html"><tt>\newtheorem</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-21.html"><tt>\newfont</tt></A>
+</ul>
+These must be used for entities which are not already defined. To
+redefine something use, for example,
+<A href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></A>.
+<hr>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4246f9dee24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-170.html
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Table of Contents</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Table of Contents</font></h1>
+<p>
+ A table of contents is produced with the
+ <a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a> command. You
+ put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
+ LaTeX does the rest for you.
+ Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands.
+<p>
+ <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not
+ automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the
+ table of contents, include a
+ <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the
+ <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command.
+<p>
+ There are similar commands <tt>\listoffigures</tt> and
+ <tt>\listoftables</tt> for
+ producing a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively.
+ Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
+<p>
+ NOTE: Information for these tables and lists are placed in an auxiliary file
+ and you may have to run latex twice to get it to come out correctly.
+ If you want any of these items to be generated, you can not
+ have the <tt>\nofiles</tt> command in your document as that would suppress
+ writing of the auxiliary files.
+See also
+<ul>
+<li><a href="toc.html"><tt>\tableofcontents</tt></a>
+<li><A href="ltx-171.html"><tt>\addcontentsline</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-172.html"><tt>\addtocontents</tt></A>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a6cfc68d9f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-171.html
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addcontentsline</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addcontentsline</font></h1>
+ <tt>\addcontentsline{file}{sec_unit}{entry}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\addcontentsline</tt> command adds an entry to the specified list or
+ table where
+<ul>
+<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
+ written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot
+ (list of tables).
+<li><tt>sec_unit</tt> controls the formatting of the entry. It should be one
+ of the following, depending upon the value of the file argument:
+ <ul>
+ <li><TT>toc</TT> the name of the sectional unit, such as part or
+ subsection.
+ <li><TT>lof</TT> figure
+ <li><TT>lot</TT> table
+ </ul>
+<li><tt>entry</tt> is the text of the entry.
+</ul>
+<p>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..32423986d3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-172.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocontents</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocontents</font></h1>
+ <tt>\addtocontents{file}{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\addtocontents</tt> command adds text (or formatting commands) directly
+ to the file that generates the table of contents or list of figures or
+ tables.
+<ul>
+<li><tt>file</tt> is the extension of the file on which information is to be
+ written: toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or lot
+ (list of tables).
+<li><tt>text</tt> is the information to be written.
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5e94279d73a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-173.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Terminal Input and Output</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Terminal Input and Output</font></h1>
+Input from or output to the terminal is controlled by
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-175.html">\typein</A>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6cf8f287e3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-174.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \typeout</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typeout</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\typeout{msg}</tt>
+<p>
+ Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and in the log file. Commands in
+ <tt>msg</tt> that are defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt>
+ or <tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> are replaced by their
+ definitions before being printed.
+<p>
+ LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space and
+ ignoring spaces after a command name apply to <tt>msg</tt>.
+ A <a href="ltx-431.html"<tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> command
+ in <tt>msg</tt> causes a single space to be printed.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b466a07ef25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-175.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \typein</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\typein</font></h1>
+ <tt>\typein[cmd]{msg}</tt>
+<p>
+ Prints <tt>msg</tt> on the terminal and causes LaTeX to stop and wait for you
+ to type a line of input, ending with return. If the <tt>cmd</tt> argument is
+ missing, the typed input is processed as if it had been included in
+ the input file in place of the <tt>\typein</tt> command. If the <tt>cmd</tt>
+ argument is present, it must be a command name. This command name is then
+ defined or redefined to be the typed input.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9606ffcc49f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-176.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Typefaces</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Typefaces</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The typeface is specified by giving the size and style. A typeface is
+ also called a font.
+<p>
+ In <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> the "styles" are replaced by a
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme.
+
+<H2>Subtopics</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A>
+<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
+<li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..36d68f86c0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-177.html
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Styles</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Styles</font></h1>
+ The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX. Note
+ that <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a> differs on this point,
+ having instead a <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a> scheme,
+ but the following should still work (certainly in 2.09 mode).
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> Roman.
+ <li><a href="ltx-249.html"><tt>\it</tt></a> Italics.
+ <li><a href="ltx-221.html"><tt>\em</tt></a> Emphasis
+ (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>).
+ <li><a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> (LaTeX2e emphasis command)
+ <li><a href="ltx-204.html"><tt>\bf</tt></a> Boldface.
+ <li><a href="ltx-316.html"><tt>\sl</tt></a> Slanted.
+ <li><a href="ltx-313.html"><tt>\sf</tt></a> Sans serif.
+ <li><a href="ltx-308.html"><tt>\sc</tt></a> Small caps.
+ <li><a href="ltx-331.html"><tt>\tt</tt></a> Typewriter.
+<p>
+ <li><a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt> and <tt>\unboldmath</tt></a>
+ (affects math mode fonts only)
+ </ul>
+These are LaTeX
+<a href="declarations.html"><em>delcarations</em></a> (with the exception of
+<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a>),
+i.e., they do not act on an argument, but change the way LaTeX prints the
+following text. The <em>scope</em> of a declaration is ended by a right
+brace (<tt>}</tt>) or an <tt>\end{}</tt> command whose matching
+left brace (<tt>{</tt>) or <tt>\begin{}</tt> precedes the declaration.
+<p>
+Thus, for a short piece of italics or bold-face text one would use
+<pre>
+ This is {\it italics} and this is {\bf in boldface}.
+</pre>
+which would be set as "This is <em>italics</em> and this is
+<strong>in boldface</strong>.
+<p>
+In LaTeX2e the
+<a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a> command is considered more
+suitable for short stretches of emphasized text. A typical use would be
+<pre>
+ <tt>This is \emph{emphasized text}.</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See also Typeface <a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a><br>
+LaTeX2e <a href="fonts2e.html">Font Selection</a><br>
+See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 19 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e29edcf5d4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-178.html
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Sizes</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Sizes</font></h1>
+ The following type size commands, in order of increasing font size,
+ are supported by LaTeX.
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-328.html"><tt>\tiny</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-309.html"><tt>\scriptsize</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-233.html"><tt>\footnotesize</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-317.html"><tt>\small</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-282.html"><tt>\normalsize</tt></a> (default)
+ <li><a href="ltx-253.html"><tt>\large</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-254.html"><tt>\Large</tt></a> (capital "l")
+ <li><a href="ltx-255.html"><tt>\LARGE</tt></a> (all caps)
+ <li><a href="ltx-242.html"><tt>\huge</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-243.html"><tt>\Huge</tt></a> (capital "h")
+</ul>
+The default for <tt>\normalsize</tt> is 10-point, but it may differ
+for some <a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a> or their options.
+The actual size produced by these commands also depends on the Document
+Style and, in some styles, more than one of these size commands may produce
+the same actual size.
+<p>
+The new size takes effect immediately after the size command;
+if an entire paragraph or unit is set in a certain size, the size command
+should include the blank line or the <tt>\end{}</tt> which delimites
+the unit. (See <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>.)
+<p>
+These commands cannot be used in <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a>.
+However, part of a formula may be set in a different size by using
+an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command containing the
+size command.
+<hr>
+See also Typeface <a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>,
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e Font Selection</a><br>
+See also <a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8635de367ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-179.html
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX subscripts</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Subscripts</font></h1>
+<p>
+ To get an expression, <tt>exp</tt>, to appear as a subscript, you just type
+ <tt>_{exp}</tt>.<p>
+ Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode.
+ Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text:
+<pre>
+ <tt>H$_2$O is the formula for water</tt>
+</pre>
+should display as "H<sub>2</sub>O is the formula for water".
+Note that the braces around the argument may be omitted if the
+subscript is a single character.
+<p>
+If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter.
+The following are equivalent:<br>
+<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre>
+<p>
+Subscripts are normally displayed in a smaller font; to prevent this and,
+for example, use a standard Roman font, one would use;
+<pre>
+ <tt>$J_{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> Roman}$</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+ See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..715be743f32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-18.html
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcommand and \renewcommand</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcommand \renewcommand</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\newcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt>
+<br>
+ <tt>\renewcommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt>
+<br>
+ <tt>\providecommand{cmd}[args][opt]{def}</tt> --
+ <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a>
+<p>
+ These commands define (or redefine) a command.
+<ul>
+<li><TT>cmd</TT> The name of the new or redefined command.
+ A <tt>\</tt> followed by a string of lower and/or uppercase
+ letters or a <tt>\</tt> followed by a single nonletter.
+ For <tt>\newcommand</tt> the name must
+ not be already defined and must not begin with <tt>\end</tt>; for
+ <tt>\renewcommand</tt> it must already be defined. The
+ <tt>\providecommand</tt> command is identical to the <tt>\newcommand</tt>
+ command if a command with this name does not exist; if it does
+ already exist, the <tt>\providecommand</tt> does nothing and the
+ old definition remains in effect.
+<p>
+<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+ the command being defined. The default is for the command to
+ have no arguments.
+<p>
+<li><tt>opt</tt> (<strong><a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e only</a></strong>)
+ If present, then the first of the number of arguments specified by
+ <tt>args</tt> is optional with a default value of <tt>opt</tt>;
+ if absent, then all of the arguments are required.
+<p>
+<li><TT>def</TT> The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd; a
+ parameter of the form #n in cmd is replaced by the text of the
+ nth argument when this substitution takes place.
+</ul>
+<h2>Examples</h2>
+<tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O}</tt>
+<p>
+This would allow one to write, e.g.,
+<pre>
+ The formula for water is \water.
+</pre>
+or
+<pre>
+ \water\ is the formula for water.
+</pre>
+Note, in the second case, the trailing <tt>\</tt> followed by a blank
+is required to ensure a blank space after the H<sub>2</sub>O;
+LaTeX ignores the blank following a command, so the space has
+to be specifically inserted with the
+<a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a>.
+<p>
+As a second example consider
+<p>
+<tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}</tt>
+<p>
+Note that this will produce the desired formula
+in text (paragraph) mode because of the <tt>$...$</tt> in the definition.
+In math mode, however, the first <tt>$</tt>
+in the definition will cause LaTeX to leave math mode, causing problems.
+<p>
+In <strong>LaTeX 2.09</strong> a standard trick for getting around this is
+to put the math-mode expression in an
+<a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>, viz.,
+<pre>
+ <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\mbox{$a^{2}+b^{2}$}}</tt>
+</pre>
+<p>
+In <strong>LaTeX2e</strong> the
+<a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a> command has been
+provided to alleviate this problem. The argument of the <tt>\ensuremath</tt>
+command is always processed in math mode, regardless of the current mode.
+Using this mechanism the above could be written as
+<pre>
+ <tt>\newcommand{\hypotenuse}{\ensuremath{a^{2}+y^{2}}}</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a><br>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f1dc0b481e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-180.html
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Superscripts</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Superscripts</font></h1>
+<p>
+ To get an expression, exp, to appear as a superscript, you just type
+ <tt>^{exp}</tt>.<p>
+ Can be used only in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a> mode.
+Thus, for a simple expression that is part of the running text:
+<pre>
+ <tt>x$^3$ is the third power of x</tt>
+</pre>
+should display as "x<sup>3</sup> is the third power of x". Note that
+the braces around the argument may be omitted if the superscript is
+a single character.
+<p>
+If a symbol has both subscripts and superscripts, the order doesn't matter.
+The following are equivalent:<br>
+<pre> <tt>a_n^2</tt> and <tt>a^2_n</tt></pre>
+<p>
+Superscripts may have their own superscripts:
+<pre>
+ <tt>$x^{y^{z}}$</tt>
+</pre>
+should display something like
+<pre>
+ z
+ y
+ x
+</pre>
+<hr>
+ See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4c58f7aba77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-181.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \\</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\\</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\\[*][extra-space]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\\</tt> command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional
+ argument, extra-space, that specifies how much extra vertical space is
+ to be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\\*</tt> command is the same as the ordinary <tt>\\</tt> command except that it
+ tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+<p>
+ These commands are <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-202.html">Array</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a>, and
+ <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> Environments<br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e2f0ee12b6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-182.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \-</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\-</font></h1>
+<p>
+<h2>In normal text</h2>
+ the <tt>\-</tt> command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
+ point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find
+ all correct hyphenation points. The <tt>\-</tt> command is used for the
+ exceptional cases.
+<p>
+<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
+ the <tt>\-</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+ commands one tab stop to the left.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-244.html"><tt>\hyphenation</tt></a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..daf7a958ded
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-183.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \;</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\;</font></h1>
+ Include a thick space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f363524f581
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-184.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \:</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\:</font></h1>
+ Include a medium space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fda562d9408
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-185.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \,</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\,</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Include a thin space; can be used in all <a href="ltx-130.html">modes</a>,
+ not just math.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8046229a6f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-186.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \!</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\!</font></h1>
+ Include a negative thin space in <a href="ltx-115.html">math mode</a>.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0a7ae1218df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-187.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \=</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\=</font></h1>
+<h2>In normal text</h2>
+Produces a macron <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> (an over bar)
+on the following character.
+
+<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
+ The <tt>\=</tt> command sets the tab stops.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a022349e222
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-188.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \&gt;</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\&gt;</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\&gt;</tt> command causes LaTeX to advance to the next tab stop.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9150944470a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-189.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \&lt;</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\&lt;</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\&lt;</tt> command allows you to put something to the left of the local
+ margin without changing the margin.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a0474f32e71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-19.html
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newenvironment</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newenvironment</font></h1>
+
+ <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt>
+ <tt>\renewenvironment{nam}[args]{begdef}{enddef}</tt>
+<p>
+ These commands define or redefine an environment.
+<p>
+<ul>
+<li><TT>nam</TT> The name of the environment.
+ For <tt>\newenvironment</tt> there
+ must be no currently defined environment by that name, nor may the
+ command <tt>\nam</tt> be currently defined. For
+ <tt>\renewenvironment</tt> the
+ environment "<tt>nam</tt>" must already be defined. <tt>nam</tt>
+ may contain letters, numbers, and asterisks; it may <strong>not</strong>
+ begin with "end...".
+<p>
+<li><TT>args</TT> An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+ the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
+<p>
+<li><TT>begdef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ <tt>\begin{nam}</tt>; a parameter of the form <tt>#n</tt> in
+ <tt>begdef</tt> is replaced by
+ the text of the nth argument when this substitution takes place.
+<p>
+<li><TT>enddef</TT> The text substituted for every occurrence of
+ <tt>\end{nam}</tt>. It may not contain any argument parameters.
+</ul>
+<h2>Changes in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a></h2>
+It is possible to have an optional argument, the form of the command being
+<pre>
+ <tt>\newenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \renewenvironment{nam}[args][opt]{begdef}{enddef}</tt>
+</pre>
+If <tt>opt</tt> is present, the first of the <tt>args</tt> arguments
+is optional with default value <tt>opt</tt>. If it is absent all
+arguments are mandatory.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-17.html">Defining commands</a>,
+<a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..edd61c28adf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-190.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \+</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\+</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\+</tt> command moves the left margin of the next and all the following
+ commands one tab stop to the right.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..05f53f0e3d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-191.html
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \'</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\'</font></h1>
+<h2>In normal text</h2>
+Produces an acute <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character.
+
+<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
+ The <tt>\'</tt> command moves everything that you have typed so far in the
+ current column , everything starting from the most recent
+ <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\&lt;</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-192.html"><tt> \'</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>,
+ or
+ <a href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></a>
+ command, to the right of the previous column, flush
+ against the current column's tab stop.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+<A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
+ Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9ae2a1b7189
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-192.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \`</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\`</font></h1>
+<p>
+<h2>In normal text</h2>
+Produces a grave <a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> on the following character.
+
+<h2>In the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a> environment</h2>
+ The <tt>\`</tt> command allows you to put text flushed right against any tab
+ stop, including tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right
+ of the last column because there's no tab stop there. The <tt>\`</tt> command
+ moves all the text that follows it, up to the
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"> <tt>\\</tt></a> or
+ <tt>\end{tabbing}</tt>
+ command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
+ environment. There must be no
+ <a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></a> or
+ <a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a> command between the <tt>\`</tt> and the
+ command that ends the line.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64f5fabb3c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-195.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtocounter</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtocounter</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\addtocounter{counter}{value}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\addtocounter</tt> command increments the <tt>counter</tt>
+ by the amount
+ specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument,
+ which can be negative.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b91b06f440
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-198.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addvspace</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addvspace</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\addvspace{length}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\addvspace</tt> command normally adds a vertical space of height
+ <tt>length</tt>.
+ However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
+ point in the output by a previous <tt>\addvspace</tt> command, then this
+ command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length
+ of the total vertical space equal to length.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cee315a9884
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-199.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \alph</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\alph</font></h1>
+
+ <tt>\alph{counter}</tt>
+<p>
+ This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed in
+ alphabetic characters. The <tt>\alph</tt> command causes lower case alphabetic
+ characters, i.e., a, b, c..., while the <tt>\Alph</tt> command causes upper
+ case alphabetic characters, i.e., A, B, C...
+<p>
+ The value of the counter must be less than 27.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9537a1851fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-2.html
@@ -0,0 +1,328 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Commands</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h2><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font></h2>
+
+<hr width="10%" align=left>
+
+<h1><font color="#cc0000">Help by <a href="#subj">Subject</a>,
+<a href="#cmd">Command</a>, or <a href="#env">Environment</a></font></h1>
+
+
+<h2><a name="subj">Subjects</a></h2>
+
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accenting characters</a> (umlauts, graves, etc.)
+ <li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a> (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Commands</a>, defining and redefining
+ <li><a href="ltx-434.html">Comments in input file</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-430.html">Dashes</a>
+ <li><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> (changing how things look)
+ <li><a href="ltx-17.html">Defining New Commands</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>
+ (or see <a href="#env">list below</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Fonts</a>
+ <li><a href="fragile.html">Fragile commands</a> (and how to protect them)
+ <li><a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-402.html">International characters and punctuation</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a> and how to change them
+ <li><a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a> (as in "Dear John")
+ <li><a href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</a>
+ <li><a href="lists.html">Lists</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a> (paragraph, left-right, math)
+ <li><a href="ltx-402.html">Non-English characters and punctuation</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-43.html">Picture environment</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-433.html">Quotation Marks</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>: # $ % &amp; ~ _ ^ \ { }
+ <li>Special Symbols
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents on characters</a>
+ (umlauts, graves, etc.)
+ <li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a> (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a> (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
+ (parenthesis-like objects; math mode)
+ <li><a href="ellipses.html">Ellipses</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a> (math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math functions</a>
+ (sin, cos, log, ...; math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size math symbols</a>
+ (sums, integrals, ...; math mode)
+ </ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-169.html">Starting and Ending</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</a> and
+ <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-67.html">Table</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-68.html">Tabular</a> and
+ <a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</a> Environments
+ <li><a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-173.html">Terminal Input and Output</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>
+</ul>
+
+<h2><a name="cmd">LaTeX Commands</a></h2>
+
+<p>A LaTeX command begins with the command name, which consists of a <tt>\</tt>
+followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter.
+Arguments contained in square brackets [] are optional while arguments
+contained in braces {} are required.</p>
+
+<p>NOTE: LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case
+unless explicitly directed to do otherwise.</p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> (force ordinary space)
+ <li><a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@</tt></a> (following period ends sentence)
+ <li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (new line)
+ <li><a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a> (thin space)
+ <li><a href="ltx-183.html"><tt>\;</tt></a> (thick space, math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-184.html"><tt>\:</tt></a> (medium space, math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-186.html"><tt>\!</tt></a> (negative thin space, math mode)
+ <li><a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a>
+ (hyphenation; <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a>
+ (set tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></a>
+ (tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\&lt;</tt></a>
+ (back tab, see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a>
+ (see <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></a>
+ (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></a>
+ (<a href="ltx-401.html">accent</a> or <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-403.html"><tt>\|</tt></a> (double vertical lines, math mode)
+ <li><tt>\(</tt> and <tt>\)</tt>
+ (define <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math environment</a>)
+ <li><tt>\[</tt> and <tt>\]</tt>
+ (define <a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath environment</a>)
+ <li><a href="ltx-171.html">\addcontentsline</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-172.html">\addtocontents</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-93.html">\address</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-198.html">\addvspace</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-200.html">\appendix</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-203.html">\author</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a>
+ <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip</a>
+ <li><a href="baselineskip.html">\baselinestretch</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-206.html">\bigskip</a>
+ <li><a href="boldmath.html">\boldmath</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a>
+ <li><a href="caption.html">\caption</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-30.html">\centering</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-210.html">\circle</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-211.html">\cite</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-214.html">\cline</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-98.html">\closing</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-217.html">\date</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-220.html">\dotfill</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-221.html">\em</a>
+ <li><a href="ensuremath.html">\ensuremath</a> (LaTeX2e)
+ <li><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-235.html">\frac</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-236.html">\frame</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a>
+ <li><a href="frenchsp.html">\frenchspacing</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-240.html">\hrulefill</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-242.html">\huge</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-243.html">\Huge (capital "h")</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-245.html">\include</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-247.html">\indent</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-248.html">\input</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a>
+ <li><a href="item.html">\item</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-251.html">\kill</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-252.html">\label</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-253.html">\large</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-254.html">\Large (capital "l")</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-255.html">\LARGE (all caps)</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\left</a>
+ <li><a href="lefteqn.html">\lefteqn</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-257.html">\line</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-259.html">\linethickness</a>
+ <li><a href="textwidth.html">\linewidth</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-261.html">\location</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-263.html">\maketitle</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-264.html">\markboth \markright</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a>
+ <li><a href="stackrel.html#mathop">\mathop</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-266.html">\medskip</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-269.html">\multiput</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\newcommand</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-19.html">\newenvironment</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-21.html">\newfont</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-87.html">\newlength</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-275.html">\newline</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-277.html">\newsavebox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-20.html">\newtheorem</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-280.html">\noindent</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-282.html">\normalsize</a> (default)
+ <li><a href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-404.html#not">\not</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-97.html">\opening</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-286.html">\oval</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-287.html">\overbrace</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-288.html">\overline</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-137.html">\pagenumbering</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-291.html">\pageref</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-138.html">\pagestyle</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-293.html">\par</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-294.html">\parbox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent</a>
+ <li><a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>
+ <li><a href="fragile.html">\protect</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\providecommand</a> (LaTeX2e)
+ <li><a href="ltx-296.html">\put</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-300.html">\raggedleft</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-301.html">\raggedright</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-302.html">\raisebox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-303.html">\ref</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\right</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-305.html">\roman</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-306.html">\rule</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\savebox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-307.html">\sbox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-308.html">\sc</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-309.html">\scriptsize</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-90.html">\settowidth</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-313.html">\sf</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-314.html">\shortstack</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-315.html">\signature</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-316.html">\sl</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-317.html">\small</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-318.html">\smallskip</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-319.html">\sqrt</a>
+ <li><a href="stackrel.html">\stackrel</a>
+ <li><a href="toc.html">\tableofcontents</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-323.html">\telephone</a>
+ <li><a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\textheight</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-324.html">\thanks</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-140.html">\thispagestyle</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-328.html">\tiny</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-329.html">\title</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-330.html">\today</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-331.html">\tt</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-174.html">\typeout</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-175.html">\typein</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-335.html">\underbrace</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-336.html">\underline</a>
+ <li><a href="unitlength.html">\unitlength</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-337.html">\usebox</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-339.html">\value</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-341.html">\vector</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-342.html">\verb</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-345.html">\vfill</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-346.html">\vline</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-403.html#big">\vphantom</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>
+</ul>
+
+
+<h2><a name="env">LaTeX Environments</a></h2>
+
+<p>LaTeX <a href="ltx-27.html">environments</a> are created by</p>
+
+<pre> \begin{<b>environment</b>} ... \end{<b>environment</b>}</pre>
+
+<p><a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a> can be effected by an
+environment of the same name.</p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-29.html">center</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-31.html">description</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-229.html">flushright</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-250.html">itemize</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-260.html">list</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-43.html">picture</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-297.html">quotation</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-67.html">table</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-77.html">theorem</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</a>
+ <li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-81.html">verse</a>
+</ul>
+
+<hr>
+
+<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a></p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Page revised: 1997:05:15, RBS
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fcb6b6960d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-20.html
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newtheorem</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newtheorem</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}{caption}[within]</tt>
+ <tt>\newtheorem{env_name}[numbered_like]{caption}</tt>
+<p>
+ This command defines a theorem-like environment.
+<ul>
+<li><TT>env_name</TT> The name of the environment -- a string of letters.
+ Must not be the name of an existing environment or counter.
+<p>
+<li><TT>caption</TT> The text printed at the beginning of the environment,
+ right before the number.
+<p>
+<li><TT>within</TT> The name of an already defined counter, usually of a
+ sectional unit. Provides a means of resetting the new theorem
+ counter within the sectional unit.
+<p>
+<li><TT>numbered_like</TT> The name of an already defined theorem-like
+ environment.
+</ul>
+
+ The <tt>\newtheorem</tt> command may have at most one optional argument.
+
+<hr>
+Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d49f3203700
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-200.html
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \appendix</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\appendix</font></h1>
+ <tt>\appendix</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\appendix</tt> command changes the way sectional units are numbered.
+ The <tt>\appendix</tt> command generates no text and does not affect the
+ numbering of parts.
+<p>Thus, if you want your appendix to be set off with a section-like
+label you need something like<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{<a href="ltx-29.html">center</a>}
+ {<a href="ltx-204.html">\bf</a> APPENDIX}
+ \end{center}</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+I have found the <tt>\appendix</tt> command to sometimes cause
+problems since <em>everything</em> which follows it is treated as part of
+the appendix, for example, a list of figures, which I generally
+want to place after an appendix is labeled "Appendix: List of Figures".
+<p>
+One can create a section labeled "APPENDIX" with distinctive numbering
+by using the <a href="ltx-141.html"><tt>\section</tt></a> command
+with suitably redefined commands for the <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>.
+The following example generates a single "Appendix" with equations numbered
+A-1, A-2, ... <pre>
+ <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\theequation}{A-\arabic{equation}}
+ % redefine the command that creates the equation no.
+ <a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{equation}{0} % reset counter
+ <a href="ltx-141.html">\section*</a>{APPENDIX} % use *-form to suppress numbering</tt>
+</pre>
+If one had several appendices, appropriate numbering could be obtained by
+redefining the <tt>\thesection</tt> command and resetting the section
+counter in an analogous manner.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d64e76faf58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-201.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \arabic</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\arabic</font></h1>
+
+ <tt>\arabic{counter}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\arabic</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt>
+ to be printed in arabic numbers, i.e., 3.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5727ba7bcfd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-202.html
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX arrays</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrays</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{array}[pos]{vvvv}
+ column 1 entry &amp: column 2 entry ... &amp; column n entry \\
+ ...
+ ...
+ ...
+ \end{array}
+</pre><p>
+ The array environment, like the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a>
+ environment, produces a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a>
+ consisting of a sequence of rows of
+ vertically aligned columns. It can be used only within the
+ <a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a>.
+<p>
+ There is a single mandatory argument describing the number of columns and
+ the alignment within each of them.
+ Each of the <tt>v</tt>'s in the argument specifies a column and may be
+ a <tt>l</tt>, <tt>c</tt>, or <tt>r</tt> indicating that the column should
+ be flush left, centered, or flush right, respectively. For more
+ complex options, see the <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a>
+ which uses the same format.
+<p>
+ The optional <tt>pos</tt> argument specifies the alignment of the array with
+ its surrounding environment (recall that LaTeX treats boxes as one,
+ albeit large letter). The options are
+<ul>
+<li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row
+<li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row
+</ul>
+The default is to align on the center of the array.
+<p>
+ Column entries must be separated by an <tt>&amp;</tt>. Column entries
+ may include other LaTeX commands, even other arrays.
+ Each row of the array must be terminated with
+ the string <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>.
+ Note that there is no <tt>&amp;</tt> after the last
+ item in a row and no <tt>\\</tt> after the last row. (An exception is if
+ an <tt><a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a></tt> is used to place a line
+ at the bottom; it follows a <tt>\\</tt>.)
+<p>
+Each item in the array is treated as if it were surrounded by braces. Thus,
+a <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a> within an array item is
+local to that item, i.e., it is ended by an <tt>&amp;</tt> or <tt>\\</tt>.
+<p>
+Horizontal and vertical lines in the array are produced with
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-214.html"><tt>\cline</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-346.html"><tt>\vline</tt></a>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br>
+ <li><a href="ltx-115.html">math environment</a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5c5e6604c0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-203.html
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \author</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\author</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\author{names}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\author</tt> command declares the author(s), where names is a list of
+ authors separated by <tt>\and</tt> commands. Use
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
+ to separate lines within a
+ single author's entry -- for example, to give the author's institution
+ or address.
+<p>
+ NOTE: The milstd and book-form styles have re-defined the
+ <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a>
+ command. The
+ <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a>
+ declaration is the only command that has any meaning.
+<p>
+ A footnote for an author is produced with the
+ <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A><br>
+See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>,
+ <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..44ed7387d11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-204.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bf</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bf</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Boldface typeface.
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d290d2c7cb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-205.html
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bibitem</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bibitem</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\bibitem[label]{cite_key}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\bibitem</tt> command generates an entry labeled by <tt>label</tt>.
+ If the <tt>label</tt>
+ argument is missing, a number is generated as the label, using
+ the <tt>enumiv</tt>
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>.
+ The <tt>cite_key</tt> is a mnemonic consisting of any sequence of letters,
+ numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
+<p>
+ <tt>\bibitem</tt> and <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> are used
+ together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and
+ <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence
+ between items in the Reference or Bibliography
+ (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment).
+<p>
+ This command writes
+ an entry on the aux file containing <tt>cite_key</tt> and the item's
+ <tt>label</tt>.
+ When this aux file is read by the
+ <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command, the item's
+ <tt>label</tt> is associated with <tt>cite_key</tt>,
+ causing the reference to <tt>cite_key</tt> by a
+ <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a> command to produce the
+ associated <tt>label</tt>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A><br>
+See also <A href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></A>,
+ <a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6649b51b387
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-206.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \bigskip</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\bigskip</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\bigskip</tt> command is equivalent to
+ <tt>\vspace{\bigskipamount}</tt> where
+ <tt>\bigskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..287ce7da3fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-207.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cdots</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cdots</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\cdots</tt> command produces a horizontal ellipsis where the dots are
+ raised to the center of the line.<br>
+ Can be used only in math mode.
+<p>
+See also:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
+</ul>
+<p>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9bfe0b716d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-21.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newfont</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newfont</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\newfont{cmd}{font_name}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ Defines the command name <tt>cmd</tt>, which must not be currently defined, to
+ be a declaration that selects the font named <tt>font_name</tt> to be the
+ current font.
+<hr>
+Go back to <a href="ltx-17.html">Definitions</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..554e7b8619d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-210.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \circle</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\circle</font></h1>
+ <tt>\circle[*]{diameter}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\circle</tt> command produces a circle of the specified diameter. If
+ the *-form of the command is used, LaTeX draws a solid circle.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a9fd440a2af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-211.html
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cite</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cite</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\cite[text]{key_list}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>key_list</tt> argument is a list of citation keys. This command
+ generates an in-text citation to the references associated with the
+ keys in <tt>key_list</tt> by entries on the aux file read by the
+ <a href="ltx-169.html"><tt>\begin{document}</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+ <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a> and <tt>\cite</tt> are used
+ together much as <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> and
+ <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> to produce a correspondence
+ between items in the Reference or Bibliography
+ (<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a> environment).
+<p>
+The <tt>\cite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+ See also <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>,
+ <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
+ See also <a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>thebibliography</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a><br>
+ Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8116dbf6023
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-212.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cleardoublepage</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cleardoublepage</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\cleardoublepage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all
+ figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be
+ printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a
+ right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8cee5c21f9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-213.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \clearpage</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\clearpage</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\clearpage</tt> command ends the current page and causes all figures
+ and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..41932ca6a02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-214.html
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \cline</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\cline</font></h1>
+ <tt>\cline{i-j}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\cline</tt> command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+ specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j, which are
+ identified in the mandatory argument.
+<p>
+It is used in the <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and
+<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment.
+<p>
+ Two (or more) successive <tt>\cline</tt> commands draw lines in the same
+ vertical position. Typically, <tt>\cline</tt> commands are placed after a
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line breadk) command so that
+ they separate items on two lines; they do
+ not, however, need a line break command afterwards.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A> and
+ <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environments<br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d0b9abfc97b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-216.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dashbox</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dashbox</font></h1>
+ <tt>\dashbox{dash length}(width,height)[pos]{ ... }</tt>
+<p>
+ Used only in the <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environement</a>,
+ the <tt>\dashbox</tt> is like <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a>
+ but has an extra argument which specifies the width of each
+ dash. A dashed box looks best when the width and height are multiples
+ of the dash length.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0878ebe1c95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-217.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \date</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\date</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\date{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\date</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt>
+ to be the document's date. With no
+ <tt>\date</tt> command, the current date is used.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b4394dae9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-218.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ddots</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ddots</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\ddots</tt> command produces a diagonal ellipsis.<br>
+ Can be used only in math mode.
+<p>
+See also:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cba6bef116a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-22.html
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Document Styles</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Document Styles</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Valid LaTeX document styles include:
+ <ul>
+ <li><I>article</I>
+ <li><I>report</I>
+ <li><I>letter</I>
+ <li><I>book</I>
+ </ul>
+ They are selected with the following command:
+<p>
+ <tt>\documentstyle[options]{style}</tt>
+<p>
+ The options for the different styles are:
+<ol>
+ <li>article: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno,
+ acm
+ <li>report: 11pt, 12pt, twoside, twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno, acm
+ <li>letter: 11pt, 12pt, fleqn, leqno, acm
+ <li>book: 11pt, 12pt, twoside,twocolumn, draft, fleqn, leqno
+</ol>
+ If you specify more than one option, they must be separated by a
+ comma.
+<hr>
+Related topics:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-227.html">\flushbottom</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-284.html">\onecolumn</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-299.html">\raggedbottom</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-332.html">\twocolumn</A>
+</ul>
+See also <a href="ltx-169.html">starting and ending</a><br>
+The <tt>\documentstyle</tt>
+command has been changed in <a href="versions.html">LaTeX2e</a><br>
+<p>
+Go to <A href="ltx-177.html">Typeface Styles</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7f3e2e56643
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-220.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \dotfill</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\dotfill</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\dotfill</tt> command produces a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> that produces dots
+ instead of just spaces.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..47de00fca4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-221.html
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \em</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\em</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Emphasis (toggles between <tt>\it</tt> and <tt>\rm</tt>).
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a>,
+ <a href="emph.html"><tt>\emph</tt></a>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..59eb551e8b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-222.html
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX enumerate</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">enumerate</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ ....
+ \end{enumerate}
+</pre>
+<p>
+ The enumerate environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations can
+ be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
+ be nested within other paragraph-making environments.
+<p>
+There must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment.
+<p>
+ Each item of an enumerated list begins with an
+ <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. The optional <tt>label</tt>
+ argument of the <tt>\item</tt> command, if given, suppresses incrementing
+ the <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>. If not given the default labels are
+ taken from the counters, <tt>enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv</tt> for the
+ four allowed levels of nesting, respectively.
+<p>
+<a name="example">The</a> numbering style for the enumeration is determined by
+the commands, <tt>\labelenumi</tt>, <tt>\labelenumii</tt>, etc., for
+the nested levels. These may be redefined with the
+<a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+For example, to use upper case letters for the first level and lower
+case letters for the second level of enumeration:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\Alph</a>{enumi}}
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumii}{<a href="ltx-199.html">\alph</a>{enumii}}</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Thanks to Robert Biddle, Robert.Biddle@Comp.VUW.AC.NZ, for info on
+the <tt>\labelenumi</tt> commands.<br>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7d5200b374a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-223.html
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX eqnarray</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">eqnarray</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ <tt>\begin{eqnarray[*]}
+ var_1 & rel_1 & eq1 \\
+ var_2 & rel_2 & eq2 \\
+ ....
+ \end{eqnarray[*]}</tt>
+</pre>
+
+ The eqnarray environment is typically used to display a sequence of equations
+ or inequalities; it may also be used to manage spacing for long equations.
+ The <a href="lefteqn.html"><tt>\lefteqn</tt></a> command is useful in
+ this environment for splitting long equations over several lines.
+<p>
+ It is very much like a three-column
+ <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>, with position argument <tt>rcl</tt>,
+ i.e., the columns are justified right, center, and left, respectively.
+ (However, <a href="ltx-268.html"><tt>\multicolumn</tt></a> may not be used.)
+<p>
+ Consecutive rows are separated by <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
+ commands and consecutive items within a
+ row separated by an <tt>&amp;</tt>. Any item may be empty, i.e., no text.
+<p>
+ A separate equation number is placed on every
+ line unless that line has a <tt>\nonumber</tt> command.
+ The optional <tt>eqnarray*</tt> form does not generate any equation numbers.
+<p>
+ A <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command anywhere within a
+ row generates a reference to that row's number.
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c007e0430da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-224.html
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX equation</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">equation</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{equation}
+ math formula
+ \label{eqno1}
+ \end{equation}
+</pre>
+
+ The equation environment centers your equation on the page and places
+ the equation number in the right margin.
+<p>
+ The <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command is required
+ only if you want to use a <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a>
+ command to refer to the number assigned to this equation.
+<p>
+The <a href="ltx-421.html">Display Math</a> environment gives the
+same effect without the equation number.
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e7b032ab3ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-225.html
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX figure</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">figure</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ <tt>\begin{figure}[placement]
+
+ body of the figure
+
+ <a href="caption.html">\caption</a>{figure title}
+ \end{figure}</tt>
+</pre>
+
+ Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
+ usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
+ Figures will not be split between two pages.
+<p>
+ The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to
+ place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
+ a float:
+<ul>
+<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the figure
+ environment appears.
+<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page.
+<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+</ul>
+ The standard report and article styles use the default placement tbp.
+<p>
+ The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
+ etc., you wish. The
+ <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a>
+ command allows you to title your figure.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3becd1a50ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-226.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fbox</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fbox</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\fbox{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is exactly the same as the
+ <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> command, except
+ that it puts a rectangular frame around the outside of the box
+ that it creates.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\fbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>.
+<hr>
+See <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt>,
+ <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9641d7baa84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-227.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \flushbottom</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\flushbottom</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\flushbottom</tt> declaration makes all text pages the same height,
+ adding extra vertical space when necessary to fill out the page.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-299.html"><tt>\raggedbottom</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..72224f71389
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-228.html
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushleft</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushleft</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ ....
+ ....
+ \end{flushleft}
+</pre>
+ The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
+ of lines that are flushed left to the left-hand margin. Each line
+ must be terminated with a
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bd65c969c83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-229.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX flushright</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">flushright</font></h1>
+
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{flushright}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ ...
+ ...
+ \end{flushright}
+</pre>
+ The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
+ of lines that are flushed right to the right-hand margin. Each line
+ must be terminated with a <tt><a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a></tt>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..03784b5af2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-230.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \fnsymbol</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\fnsymbol</font></h1>
+
+ <tt>\fnsymbol{counter}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\fnsymbol</tt> command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt>
+ to be printed in
+ a specific sequence of nine symbols that can be used for numbering
+ footnotes. (The sequence is asterisk, dagger, double dagger, section
+ mark, paragraph mark, double vertical lines, double asterisks, double
+ daggers, double double daggers.)
+<p>
+ The value of <tt>counter</tt> must be less between 1 and 9.
+<p>
+ Can be used <strong>only</strong> in math mode.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 03 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a27bb00fc67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-231.html
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnote</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnote</font></h1>
+ <tt>\footnote[num]{text}</tt>
+ The <tt>\footnote</tt> command places a numbered footnote at the bottom
+ of the current page containing the contents of the argument, <tt>text</tt>.
+ The optional argument, <tt>num</tt>, is used to change
+ the default footnote number. This command can only be used in outer
+ paragraph mode.
+<p>
+ If <tt>num</tt> is not specified, the footnote
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> is incremented and its value is used.
+<p>
+ Note that <tt>num</tt> is specified as a positive integer even if
+ the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> has been set to use letters
+ or roman numerals.
+<p>
+This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a>
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and
+ <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: RBS, 5 February 1997.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..80680af1eb1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-232.html
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotemark</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotemark</font></h1>
+<tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\footnotemark[num]</tt> command puts the footnote number in the text.
+ It is used in conjunction with <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a>
+ to produce footnotes where <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a>
+ cannot be used
+<p>
+ If <tt>num</tt> is not given the footnote <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a>
+ is incremented and used.
+<p>
+This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>,
+<a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt>
+ <tt><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A></tt><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b2b769e4ab6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-233.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotesize</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotesize</font></h1>
+ Third smallest of 10 typefaces available. This is the default size
+ for footnotes.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8a5557b3904
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-234.html
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \footnotetext</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\footnotetext</font></h1>
+ <tt>\footnotetext[num]{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\footnotetext</tt> command is used in conjunction with the
+ <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> command and
+ places the <tt>text</tt> in the argument at the bottom
+ of the page. This command can come anywhere after the
+ <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a>
+ command.
+<p>
+ The optional argument, number, is used to change the default footnote
+ number.
+ Otherwise, the footnote counter is not changed.
+<p>
+This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile.</a>
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-82.html">Footnotes</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+See also <tt><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A></tt>,
+ <tt><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A></tt><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..660f12331fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-235.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frac</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frac</font></h1>
+ <tt>\frac{num}{den}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\frac</tt> command produces the fraction num divided by den,
+ placing the numerator over a horizontal line (solidus) and the
+ denominator below.
+
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e383c0fa223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-236.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \frame</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\frame</font></h1>
+<pre>\frame{ ... }
+</pre>
+
+ The <tt>\frame</tt> command puts a rectangular frame around the object
+ specified in the argument. The reference point is the bottom left
+ corner of the frame. No extra space is put between the frame and the
+ object.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4ccb4121dab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-237.html
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \framebox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\framebox</font></h1>
+<h2>Normal use</h2>
+ <tt>\framebox[width][position]{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the
+ <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command,
+ except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
+ creates.
+<p>
+ The framebox command produces a rule of thickness <tt>\fboxrule,</tt> and
+ leaves a space <tt>\fboxsep</tt> between the rule and the contents of the box.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+
+<h2>In picture environment</h2>
+<tt>\framebox(width,height)[position]{...}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\framebox</tt> command is exactly the same as the
+ <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command,
+ except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
+ creates.
+<hr>
+ See also <tt><a href="ltx-226.html">\fbox</a></tt>,
+ <tt><a href="ltx-262.html">\makebox</a></tt>,
+ <tt><a href="ltx-216.html">\dashbox</a></tt><br>
+ See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A>.<br>
+ Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>.
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d2b610d8a4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-238.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hfill</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hfill</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\hfill</tt> fill command produces a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or
+ shrink horizontally. It will be filled with spaces. It is equivalent
+ to <tt><a href="ltx-241.html">\hspace</a>\fill</tt>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0aa58a30d9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-239.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hline</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hline</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\hline</tt> command will draw a horizontal line the width of the table.
+ It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between
+ the rows of the table.
+<p>
+ Two successive <tt>\hline</tt> commands leave a space between the
+ lines; this space does <strong>not</strong> contain the vertical lines
+ specified by <tt>|</tt> characters in the <tt>col</tt> argument of the
+ <a href="ltx-68.html"><tt>\begin{tabular}{col}</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+ To place a line at the bottom of a table, the <tt>\hline</tt> command
+ must follow a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (line break) command
+ after the last table entry. This final line break command should be
+ present <strong>only</strong> in this circumstance.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>,
+<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A>.<br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9211fcf1f59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-240.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hrulefill</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hrulefill</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\hrulefill</tt> fill command produces a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch
+ or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal rule.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bbf4f38e56c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-241.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hspace</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hspace</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\hspace[*]{len}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\hspace</tt> command adds horizontal space. The length of the space
+ <tt>len</tt>
+ can be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points,
+ inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an
+ <tt>\hspace</tt> command. Adding negative space is like backspacing.
+<p>
+
+ LaTeX removes horizontal space that comes at the end of a line. If
+ you don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional *
+ argument. Then the space is never removed.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8f78e1596da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-242.html
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \huge</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\huge</font></h1>
+ Second largest of 10 typefaces available.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2b38b714c47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-243.html
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Huge (capital "h")</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Huge (capital "h")</font></h1>
+ Largest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in
+ this size.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..37e02cc1172
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-244.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \hyphenation</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\hyphenation</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\hyphenation{words}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\hyphenation</tt> command declares allowed hyphenation points, where
+ words is a list of words, separated by spaces, in which each
+ hyphenation point is indicated by a - character. For example
+<pre>
+ <tt>\hyphenation{fortran,er-go-no-mic}</tt></pre>
+indicates that "fortran" cannot be hyphenated and indicates allowed
+hyphenation points for "ergonomic".
+<p>
+This argument to this command should contain words composed only of normal
+letters. To suggest hyphenation points for strings containing nonletters
+or <a href="ltx-401.html">accented letters</a>, use
+the <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a> command in the input text.
+<p>
+This command is normally given in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ee636285985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-245.html
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \include</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\include</font></h1>
+ <tt>\include{file}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\include</tt> command is used in conjunction with the
+ <tt><a href="ltx-246.html">\includeonly</a></tt>
+ command for selective inclusion of files. The <tt>file</tt> argument is the
+ first name of a file, denoting <tt>file.tex</tt>. If the file is also
+ in the file list of the <tt>\includeonly</tt> command or if there is no
+ <tt>\includeonly</tt> command, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to
+<Pre>
+ <tt><a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a> \input{file} <a href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</a></tt>
+</Pre>
+ except that if the file <tt>file.tex</tt> does not exist, then a warning
+ message rather than an error is produced. If the file is not in the
+ file list, the <tt>\include</tt> command is equivalent to <tt>\clearpage</tt>.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\include</tt> command may not appear in the preamble or in a file read
+ by another <tt>\include</tt> command.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-248.html"><tt>\input</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..08951cd0f9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-246.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \includeonly</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\includeonly</font></h1>
+ <tt>\includeonly{file_list}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\includeonly</tt> command controls which files will be read in by an
+ <a href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></a> command.
+ It can only appear in the preamble.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dc52f57e073
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-247.html
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \indent</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\indent</font></h1>
+ This produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of the
+ paragraph indentation
+ (<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a>).
+ It is used to add paragraph indentation where
+ it would otherwise be suppressed.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-280.html"><tt>\noindent</tt></a><br>
+See also <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0de0c73f47a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-248.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \input</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\input</font></h1>
+ <tt>\input{file}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\input</tt> command causes the indicated <tt>file</tt>
+ to be read and processed,
+ exactly as if its contents had been inserted in the current file at
+ that point. The file name may be a complete file name with extension
+ or just a first name, in which case the file <tt>file.tex</tt> is used.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-165.html">Splitting the Input</A><br>
+See also <A href="ltx-245.html"><tt>\include</tt></A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 30 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..18c1d92a31e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-249.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \it</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\it</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Italics typeface.
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c8e7d40c39b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-250.html
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX itemize</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">itemize</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{itemize}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ ....
+ \end{itemize}</tt>
+</pre>
+
+ The itemize environment produces a list with "tick-marks" (typically
+ "bullets" for first level). Itemizations can be
+ nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
+<p>
+ Each item of an itemized list begins with an
+ <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. There
+ must be at least one <tt>\item</tt> command within the environment.
+<p>
+The default optional
+<tt>label</tt> argument of the <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
+is given by the <tt>\labelitemi, \labelitemii, \labelitemiii, \labelitemiv</tt>
+commands, respectively, depending on the nesting level.
+These may be redefined with the <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\renewcommand</tt></a>
+command. For example, to make the first level marks nice five-point stars,
+<pre>
+ <tt>\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$<a href="ltx-404.html">\star</a>$}</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8ad9d646231
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-251.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \kill</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\kill</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\kill</tt> command allows you to set tab stops without producing text.
+ It works just like the
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> except
+ that it throws away the current line
+ instead of producing output for it. The effect of any
+ <a href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></a> or
+ <a href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></a>
+ commands in that line remain in effect.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing</A> Environment<br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e70e99f308
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-252.html
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \label</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\label</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\label{key}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ A <tt>\label</tt> command appearing in ordinary text assigns to the
+ <tt>key</tt> the
+ number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered
+ environment assigns that number to the <tt>key</tt>.
+<p>
+ A <tt>key</tt> can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or punctuation
+ characters. Upper- and lowercase letters are different.
+<p>
+ The number assigned to the key can be accessed by use of the
+ <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a> command. For example,
+<pre>
+ \begin{equation} ....
+ ....
+ \label{eq:no1}
+ \end{equation}
+ ...
+ One can see from Eq.~(\ref{eq:no1}) that ...
+</pre>
+<p>
+In a <a href="ltx-67.html">table</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figure</a>
+environment, the <tt>\label</tt> command should follow the
+<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command (or be part of its
+argument) since it is the <tt>\caption</tt> command which generates the
+number.
+<p>
+The <tt>\label</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> but it
+can be used in the argument of a
+<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a> or
+<a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-303.html"><tt>\ref</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a> <br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9413e7a7f59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-253.html
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \large</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\large</font></h1>
+ Slightly larger than default typeface size.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6a981aa4a57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-254.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \Large (capital "l")</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\Large (capital "l")</font></h1>
+ Fourth largest of typefaces available. Is generally the default for
+ titles.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d1d96f9c62a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-255.html
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \LARGE (all caps)</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\LARGE (all caps)</font></h1>
+ Third largest of typefaces available.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5ba330fb9fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-256.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ldots</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ldots</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\ldots</tt> command produces an ellipsis.<br>
+ Unlike <tt>\cdots, \ddots, \vdots,</tt>
+ this command works in any mode, not just math mode.
+<p>
+See also:
+<ul>
+ <li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A>
+ <li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A>
+ <li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
+<p>
+ <li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+ <li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..616a63de4f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-257.html
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \line</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\line</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\line(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\line</tt> command draws a line of the specified length and slope.
+<p>
+The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed
+integers of magnitude less than or equal to 6 and which have no common
+divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal
+line; (1,1) gives a slope of
+45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical line; (-1,1) is 135 degrees.
+<p>
+The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the line is given by the
+<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical line in
+which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ef7125b06bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-258.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linebreak</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linebreak</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\linebreak[number]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current line at the
+ point of the command. With the optional argument, number, you can
+ convert the <tt>\linebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number
+ must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
+ insistent the request is.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\linebreak</tt> command causes LaTeX to stretch the line so it extends
+ to the right margin.
+<p>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9bce5892257
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-259.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \linethickness</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\linethickness</font></h1>
+ <tt>\linethickness{dimension}</tt>
+<p>
+ Declares the thickness of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture
+ environment to be dimension, which must be a positive length. It does
+ not affect the thickness of slanted lines and circles, or the quarter
+ circles drawn by <tt>\oval</tt> to form the corners of an oval.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f89f998f05c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-260.html
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX list enviroment</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">list</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ <tt>\begin{list}{label}{spacing}
+ \item First item
+ \item Second item
+ ....
+ \end{list}</tt>
+</pre>
+ The <tt>label</tt> argument specifies the <em>default</em> label for items
+ in the list; it may be overriden with the optional argument of the
+ <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command. It is
+ a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the
+ label. This argument can and usually does contain other LaTeX
+ commands.
+<p>
+ The <tt>spacing</tt> argument contains commands to change the spacing
+ parameters for the list. This argument will most often be null, i.e.
+ <tt>{}</tt>. This will select default spacings, which depends on the
+ <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> and options, and
+ which should suffice for
+ most cases. However, the commands which can be put here are
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\topsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space at top of list
+<li><tt>\partopsep</tt> extra length at top if environment is prececed
+ by a blank line (it should be a <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a>)
+<li><tt>\itemsep</tt> amount of extra vertical space between items
+<li><tt>\parsep</tt> amount of vertical space between paragraphs <em>within</em>
+ an item
+<li><tt>\leftmargin</tt> horizontal distance between the left margins of
+ the environment and the list; must be nonnegative
+<li><tt>\rightmargin</tt> horizontal distance betwen the right margins of
+ the enviroment and the list; must be nonnegative
+<li><tt>\listparindent</tt> amount of extra space for paragraph indent <em>after
+ the first</em> in an item; can be negative
+<li><tt>\itemindent</tt> indentation of first line of an item; can be negative
+<li><tt>\labelsep</tt> separation between end of the box containing the label
+ and the text of the first line of an item
+<li><tt>\labelwidth</tt> normal width of the box containing the label; if the
+ actual label is bigger, the natural width is used, extending into the
+ space for the first line of the item's text
+<li><tt>\makelabel{label}</tt> generates the label printed by the
+ <tt>\item</tt> command
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-338.html"><tt>\usecounter{ctr}</tt></a>
+ enables the counter <tt>ctr</tt> to be used
+ for numbering items; it is initialized to zero and stepped when
+ executing an <tt>\item</tt> command that has no optional <tt>label</tt>
+ argument.
+</ul>
+
+<h2><a name="example">An Example</a></h2>
+An simple example of things that can be done with the List Enviroment
+will illustrate typical usage of the arguments. The following will
+make a list numbered by "Item-#", where the # is an upper case
+Roman numeral, and will indent the right margin the same
+as the left margin (it is not normally indented in most styles).
+<pre>
+ <tt>% define "Lcount" as a counter
+ <a href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</a>{Lcount}
+ % set the "default" label to print counter as a Roman numeral
+ \begin{list}{Item-<a href="ltx-305.html">\Roman</a>{Lcount}}
+ % inform the list command to use this counter
+ {<a href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</a>{Lcount}
+ % set rightmargin equal to leftmargin
+ <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\rightmargin}{\leftmargin}}
+ % we can now begin the "items"
+ <a href="item.html">\item</a> This is the first item
+ \item And this is the second item
+ \end{list}</tt>
+</pre>
+Note that this would produce something like:
+<pre>
+ Item-I This is the first item
+ Item-II And this is the second item
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-86.html">Lenghts</a><br>
+See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5800bce00e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-261.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \location</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\location</font></h1>
+ <tt>\location{address}</tt>
+<p>
+ This modifies your organization's standard address. This only appears
+ if the firstpage pagestyle is selected.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-91.html">Letters</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..074fa60fdc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-262.html
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \makebox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\makebox</font></h1>
+<h2>Normal use</h2>
+ <tt>\makebox[width][position]{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\makebox</tt> command creates a box to contain the specified
+ <tt>text</tt>. The
+ width of the box may be specified by the optional <tt>width</tt> argument.
+ The <tt>text</tt> in the box is set in LR mode.
+<p>
+ If the optional <tt>width</tt> argument is used, the optional
+ <tt>position</tt> argument may also be used to specify the position of
+ <tt>text</tt> within the box as follows:
+<ul>
+<li><tt>l</tt> - flushleft
+<li><tt>r</tt> - flushright
+<li><tt>s</tt> - interword space adjusted so <tt>text</tt> fills box exactly
+</ul>
+The default horizontal and vertical positioning (if the second optional
+argument is omitted) is to center <tt>text</tt>
+in the box.
+<p>
+Note that <tt>text</tt> may overflow the box, in which case it is
+typeset on top of the adjacent text. While this is generally undesirable,
+it can also be used to create special effects.
+<p>
+The <tt>\makebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<p>
+See <tt><a href="ltx-265.html">\mbox</a></tt>,
+ <tt><a href="ltx-237.html">\framebox</a></tt><br>
+See also: <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A>.
+
+<h2>In picture environment</h2>
+ <tt>\makebox(width,height)[position]{ ... }</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\makebox</tt> command for the picture environment is similar to the
+ normal <tt>\makebox</tt> command except that you must specify a width and
+ height (note that these are in parentheses) in multiples of
+ <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>.
+<p>
+ The optional argument, <tt>position</tt>, specifies the quadrant that your
+ text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
+<ul>
+<li><TT>t</TT> Moves the item to the top of the rectangle
+<li><TT>b</TT> Moves the item to the bottom
+<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the item to the left
+<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the item to the right
+</ul>
+The default horizontal and vertical positioning is to center <tt>text</tt>
+in the box.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Dec 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b1760e41993
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-263.html
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<html><head><title>Help On LaTeX \maketitle</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\maketitle</font></h1>
+ <tt>\maketitle</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\maketitle</tt> command generates a title on a separate title page -
+ except in the article style, where the title normally goes at the top
+ of the first page. Information used to produce the title is obtained
+ from the following declarations, which should precede the
+ <tt>\maketitle</tt> command.
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-217.html"><tt>\date</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></A>
+</ul>
+<p>
+The <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a>
+allows you to design your own title page, rather than using that
+created by the <tt>\maketitle</tt> command whose format is determined
+by the <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>.
+.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8395d8863f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-264.html
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<html><head>
+<title>Help On LaTeX \markboth \markright</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\markboth \markright</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\markboth{left head}{right head}</tt>
+<p>
+ <tt> \markright{right head}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\markboth</tt> and <tt>\markright</tt>
+ commands are used in conjunction with the
+ page style myheadings for setting either both or just the right
+ heading. In addition to their use with the myheadings page style, you
+ can use them to override the normal headings in the headings style,
+ since LaTeX uses these same commands to generate those heads. You
+ should note that a left-hand heading is generated by the last
+ <tt>\markboth</tt> command before the end of the page, while a right-hand
+ heading is generated by the first <tt>\markboth</tt> or <tt>\markright</tt>
+ that comes
+ on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before the
+ page.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
+<A href="ltx-138.html"><tt>\pagestyle</tt></A>.<br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d4d1b8a3a8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-265.html
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \mbox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\mbox</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\mbox{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\mbox</tt> command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
+ <tt>text</tt> in its argument. The <tt>text</tt> in the box is in LR
+ <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> which prevents it from being broken across
+ lines.
+<p>
+ The <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a> command is similar
+ except that it allows you to specify a width which is not necessarily
+ the natural width of the <tt>text</tt> and also to specify the placement
+ within the box.
+<p>
+An <tt>\mbox</tt> within <a href="ltx-130.html">math mode</a> does
+<strong>not</strong> use the current <a href="mathfonts.html">math font</a>;
+rather it uses the <a href="ltx-176.html">typeface</a> of the surrounding
+running text.
+<p>
+The <tt>\mbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-226.html"><tt>\fbox</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a><br>
+See also <A href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d6c56fb7ec8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-266.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \medskip</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\medskip</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\medskip</tt> command is equivalent to
+ <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\medskipamount}</tt> where
+ <tt>\medskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..123f724b200
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-267.html
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX minipage</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">minipage</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{minipage}[position]{width}
+ text
+ \end{minipage}
+</pre>
+ The minipage environment is similar to a
+ <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command. It takes
+ the same optional position argument and mandatory width argument. You
+ may use other paragraph-making environments such as the
+ <a href="lists.html">list-making</a> and
+ <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments inside a minipage. You can
+ also use the minipage environment or
+ <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a> command to put one or
+ more paragraphs
+ inside of a <a href="ltx-43.html">picture environment</a> or as a
+ <a href="ltx-67.html">table item</a>, for example.
+<p>
+ There is no paragraph indentation in the minipage environment. That is,
+ LaTeX sets <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\parindent</tt></a> to zero;
+ however, you may override this with a
+ <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+ Footnotes in a minipage environment are handled in a way that is
+ particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
+ <a href="ltx-231.html"><tt>\footnote</tt></a> command puts the
+ footnote at the bottom of
+ the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
+ <tt>mpfootnote</tt> <a href="ltx-3.html">counter</a> instead of the ordinary
+ footnote counter. If you want the footnote in a minipage environment
+ to be placed at the bottom of the actual page, in the usual fashion,
+ use the <a href="ltx-232.html"><tt>\footnotemark</tt></a> and
+ <a href="ltx-234.html"><tt>\footnotetext</tt></a> commands.
+<p>
+ <strong>Note</strong>: if you put one minipage inside another
+ and if you are using
+ footnotes, they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 22Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1076a69b3aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-268.html
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multicolumn</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multicolumn</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ Used only in <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> or
+ <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environments.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\multicolumn</tt> is command is
+ used to make an entry that spans several columns.
+<p>
+ It is useful for making table headings which span several columns, or
+ for changing the positioning of the heading for a single column (the
+ <tt>pos</tt> argument in <tt>\multicolumn</tt> overriding that of
+ the <tt>\tabular</tt> value, for example).
+<p>
+ The first mandatory argument, <tt>cols</tt>, specifies the number of columns to
+ span. The second mandatory argument, <tt>pos</tt>, specifies the formatting of
+ the entry;
+<ul>
+<li>c for centered
+<li>l for flushleft
+<li>r for flushright
+</ul>
+ The third mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt>,
+ specifies what text is to make up the entry.
+<p>
+ <tt>\multicolumn</tt> must either begin a row or be placed immediately
+ after an <tt>&amp;</tt>.
+
+<hr>See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>,
+ <A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cb6e02dcb4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-269.html
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \multiput</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\multiput</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\multiput(x coord,y coord)(delta x,delta y){number of copies}{object}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\multiput</tt> command can be used when you are putting the same object
+ in a regular pattern across a picture.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9746d13ae2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-27.html
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Environments</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Environments</font></h1>
+<p>
+ LaTeX provides a number of different paragraph-making environments.
+ Each environment begins and ends in the same manner.
+<p>
+<pre>
+ \begin{environment-name}
+ ....
+ ....
+ \end{environment-name}
+</pre>
+Blank lines before the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or after the <tt>\end{}</tt> cause a
+paragraph break before or after the environment.
+Blank lines after the <tt>\begin{}</tt> or before the <tt>\end{}</tt> are
+ignored.
+<p>
+All <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> have an environment of the
+same name. However, the reverse does not always work. For example,
+<tt>{\abstract Abstract text ... .}</tt> may not give correct paragraph
+breaks.
+
+<H2>Subtopics</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-420.html">abstract</a>
+<li><A href="ltx-202.html">array</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-29.html">center</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-31.html">description</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-421.html">displaymath</a>
+<li><A href="ltx-222.html">enumerate</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-224.html">equation</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-225.html">figure</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-228.html">flushleft</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-250.html">itemize</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-260.html">list</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>
+<li><A href="ltx-267.html">minipage</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-297.html">quotation</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-298.html">quote</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-58.html">tabbing</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-67.html">table</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-77.html">theorem</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-78.html">titlepage</A>
+<li><a href="trivlist.html">trivlist</a>
+<li><A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-81.html">verse</A>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="declarations.html">Declarations</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..856bad72da7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-271.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newcounter</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newcounter</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\newcounter{newname}[oldcounter]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\newcounter</tt> command defines a new counter named
+<tt>newname</tt>. The optional
+ argument <tt>oldcounter</tt> must be the name of an already defined
+ counter; if present the new counter, <tt>newname</tt>, will be
+ reset whenever <tt>oldcounter</tt>, the counter named in the optional
+ argument, is incremented.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4765fb318c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-275.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newline</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newline</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\newline</tt> command breaks the line right where it is. The
+ <tt>\newline</tt>
+ command can be used only in paragraph mode.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5d8a4bd2310
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-276.html
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newpage</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newpage</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\newpage</tt> command ends the current page.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bb7aa8fbaf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-277.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newsavebox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newsavebox</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\newsavebox{cmd}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ Declares <tt>cmd</tt>, which must be a command name that is not already
+ defined, to be a bin for saving boxes.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is a global
+ <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\newsavebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+See <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b4f1298c1a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-279.html
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nocite</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nocite</font></h1>
+ <tt>\nocite{key_list}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\nocite</tt> command produces no text, but writes key_list, which is a
+ list of one or more citation keys, on the aux file.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\nocite</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-73.html">thebibliography</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..78ec8877b28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-280.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \noindent</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\noindent</font></h1>
+ When used at the beginning of the paragraph, it suppresses the
+ paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a
+ paragraph.
+<p>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-247.html"><tt>\indent</tt></a><br>
+See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..810ea9dffbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-281.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nolinebreak</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nolinebreak</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\nolinebreak[number]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX from breaking the current
+ line at the point of the command. With the optional argument,
+ <tt>number</tt>, you can convert the
+ <tt>\nolinebreak</tt> command from a demand to a
+ request. The number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the
+ number, the more insistent the request is.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..beb6444b52e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-282.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \normalsize</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\normalsize</font></h1>
+ This is the default type size.
+ The size of <tt>\normalsize</tt> is defined by as 10pt unless the 11pt or 12pt
+ document style option is used.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c6be23554e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-283.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \nopagebreak</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\nopagebreak</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\nopagebreak[number]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command prevents LaTeX form breaking the current page
+ at the point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you
+ can convert the <tt>\nopagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The
+ number must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
+ insistent the request is.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..43be5c73ceb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-284.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \onecolumn</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\onecolumn</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\onecolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces
+ single-column output.
+<p>
+This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-332.html"><tt>\twocolumn</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0abec109128
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-286.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \oval</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\oval</font></h1>
+ <tt>\oval(width,height)[portion]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\oval</tt> command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
+ optional argument, <tt>portion</tt>, allows you to select part of the oval.
+<ul>
+<li><TT>t</TT> Selects the top portion
+<li><TT>b</TT> Selects the bottom portion
+<li><TT>r</TT> Selects the right portion
+<li><TT>l</TT> Selects the left portion
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..879f0a4f1be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-287.html
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overbrace</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overbrace</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\overbrace{equation}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\overbrace</tt> command generates a brace over
+ <tt>equation</tt>; math mode.
+<p>
+ To "label" the overbrace, use a <a href="ltx-180.html">superscript</a>.
+<hr>
+See also:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5f973045166
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-288.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \overline</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\overline</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\overline{equation}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\overline</tt> command causes the argument
+ <tt>equation</tt> to be overlined; math mode.
+<hr>
+See also:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d425455d209
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-289.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pagebreak</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pagebreak</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\pagebreak[number]</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command tells LaTeX to break the current page at the
+ point of the command. With the optional argument, <tt>number</tt>, you can
+ convert the <tt>\pagebreak</tt> command from a demand to a request. The number
+ must be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more
+ insistent the request is.
+<p>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..96782cb74ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-29.html
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX center</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">center</font></h1>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{center}
+ Text on line 1 \\
+ Text on line 2 \\
+ ...
+ ...
+ \end{center}
+</pre>
+
+ The center environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting of
+ lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the
+ current page. Each line must be terminated with the string <tt>\\.</tt>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-229.html">Flushright</a> Environments<br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b307fdd1216
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-291.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \pageref</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\pageref</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\pageref{key}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\pageref</tt> command produces the page number of the place in the text
+ where the corresponding
+ <a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command appears.
+<p>
+The <tt>\pageref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8c3c0916b17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-293.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \par</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\par</font></h1>
+
+ Equivalent to a blank line; often used to make command or environment
+ definitions easier to read.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-111.html">Making Paragraphs</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c9801ff9e45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-294.html
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parbox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parbox</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\parbox[position]{width}{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ A parbox is a box whose contents are created in paragraph mode. The
+ <tt>\parbox</tt> has two mandatory arguments:
+<ul>
+<li> <tt>width</tt>: specifies the width of the parbox, and
+<li> <tt>text</tt>: the text that goes inside the parbox.
+</ul>
+ LaTeX will position a parbox so its center lines up with the center of
+ the text line. An optional first argument allows you to
+ line up either the top or bottom line in the parbox, by using as optional
+ <tt>position</tt> argument <tt>t</tt> or <tt>b</tt>, respectively .
+<p>
+ A <tt>\parbox</tt> command is used for a parbox containing a small piece of
+ text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any
+ of the paragraph-making environments inside a <tt>\parbox</tt> argument. For
+ larger pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
+ environment, you should use a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage</a> environment.
+<p>
+The <tt>\parbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..acc52f00fde
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-296.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \put</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\put</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\put(x-coord,y-coord){object}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\put</tt> command places the <tt>object</tt>
+ specified by the mandatory argument at the given coordinates.
+<p>
+The coordinates are in units of
+<a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>
+<p>
+Some of the <tt>object</tt> items you might place are
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></a>
+</ul>
+See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1712de6aff7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-297.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX quotation</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quotation</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{quotation}
+ text
+ \end{quotation}
+</pre>
+ The margins of the quotation environment are indented on the left and
+ the right. The text is justified at both margins and there is
+ paragraph indentation. Leaving a blank line between text produces a
+ new paragraph.
+<p>
+ For a short quote (one paragraph), use the
+ <a href="ltx-298.html">quote environment</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-298.html">Quote Environment</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..415c6a86eb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-298.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX quote</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">quote</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{quote}
+ text
+ \end{quote}
+</pre>
+
+ The margins of the quote environment are indented on the left and the
+ right. The text is justified at both margins. For longer quotations
+ (more than one paragraph) use the <a href="ltx-297.html">quotation
+ environment</a>.
+
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-297.html">Quotation Environment</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dad37b276f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-299.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedbottom</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedbottom</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\raggedbottom</tt> declaration makes all pages the height of the text
+ on that page. No extra vertical space is added.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-227.html"><tt>\flushbottom</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2b424b2dd68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-3.html
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Counters</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Counters</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
+ name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
+ command that produces the number, except with no <tt>\.</tt> Below is a list
+ of some of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document styles to control
+ numbering.
+<pre>
+ part paragraph figure enumi
+ chapter subparagraph table enumii
+ section page footnote enumiii
+ subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
+ subsubsection
+</pre>
+
+<h2>Manipulating the way counters are printed</h2>
+Counters are printed in LaTeX by using a command generated as
+"<tt>\the</tt>" suffixed with the name of the counter. Thus, equation
+numbers are printed by the <tt>\theequation</tt> command, and
+section numbers by the <tt>\thesection</tt> command.
+If you want to change the way such numbers are printed, for example,
+change from arabic to Roman numerals, you need to redefine the
+appropriate command, using the
+<tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a></tt> command.
+<p>
+As an example, to number equations in an appendix as <tt>A-1</tt>,
+<tt>A-2</tt>, ... , use <pre>
+ <tt>\renewcommand{\theequation}{A-<a href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</a>{equation}}</tt></pre>
+The second argument implies that the text produced by the renewed
+<tt>\theequation</tt> command will be "A-" followed by the output from
+the <tt>\arabic{equation}</tt> command, which is the value of the
+equation counter, printed as an arabic number.
+<p>
+In <a href="lists.html">List Environments</a> the format for the
+item labels is given by commands like <tt>\labelitemi</tt> and
+<tt>\labelitemii</tt> (for the first two levels of the
+<a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>), and like <tt>\labelenumi</tt>
+(for the <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a>), and these may
+also be redefined.
+<p>
+There is an <a href="ltx-260.html#example">example</a> of manipulating such
+counters in the discussion of the List Environment.
+See also the discussions in the <a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>
+and in the <a href="ltx-222.html#example">Enumerate Environment</a>.
+<p>
+You can force a change in the number produced by any of the counters. For
+example, if you wanted to produce a single page numbered 13, you could use
+<pre>
+ <tt><a href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</a>{page}{13}</tt></pre>
+A variety of commands for manipulating counters this way are given below.
+
+<H2>Related topics</H2>
+<ul>
+<li>Commands that manupulate counters
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-195.html">\addtocounter</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-271.html">\newcounter</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-310.html">\setcounter</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-338.html">\usecounter</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-339.html">\value</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>
+</ul>
+<li>Commands that print the value of a counter in various formats
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-201.html">\arabic</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-199.html">\alph \Alph</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-305.html">\roman \Roman</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-230.html">\fnsymbol</A>
+</ul>
+<li>For some examples of usage in list environments, see
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-260.html#example">List Enviroment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-250.html">Itemize Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate Environment</a>
+</ul>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f223a7270ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-30.html
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \centering</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\centering</font></h1>
+
+<p>This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+corresponds to the center environment. This
+declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
+parbox. The text of a figure or table can be centered on the page by
+putting a <tt>\centering</tt> command at the beginning of the figure or table
+environment.</p>
+
+<p>Unlike the <a href="ltx-29.html">center environment</a>,
+the <tt>\centering</tt> command does not start
+a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph units.
+To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the declaration
+must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an environment like
+quote) that ends the paragraph unit.</p>
+
+<p><it>Editor's note: although not listed as <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>
+in Lamport, I have found it necessary to use a <tt>\protect</tt> when putting
+a <tt>\centering</tt> command in a
+<a href="ltx-3.html">sectioning command</a>.<br>
+For example,</p>
+
+<pre>
+ <tt>\section{\protect \centering Centered section heading}</tt>
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+
+<p>See also <a href="ltx-29.html">Center environment</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Revised: RBS, 21 February 1997
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5fb17cbbba9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-300.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1>
+ This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+ corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright
+ environment</a>. This
+ declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
+ parbox.
+<p>
+ Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not
+ start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+ units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+ declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
+ environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+<A href="ltx-229.html">flushright</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3d85e2cad6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-301.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1>
+ This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+ corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>.
+ This declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
+ parbox.
+<p>
+ Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not
+ start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+ units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+ declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
+ environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-29.html">Center</a>, <a href="ltx-228.html">Flushleft</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggeleft</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5b7e97253d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-302.html
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raisebox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raisebox</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\raisebox{distance}[extend-above][extend-below]{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command creates a LR box containing <tt>text</tt>;
+ it is used to raise or lower text. The first
+ mandatory argument specifies how high the text is to be raised (or
+ lowered if it is a negative amount).
+<p>
+ Sometimes it's useful to make LaTeX think something has a different
+ size than it really does - or a different size than LaTeX would
+ normally think it has. The <tt>\raisebox</tt> command lets you tell LaTeX how
+ tall it is.
+<p>
+ The first optional argument, <tt>extend-above</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the
+ text extends above the current line by the amount specified. The second
+ optional argument, <tt>extend-below</tt>, makes LaTeX think that the text
+ extends below the current line by the amount specified.
+<p>
+ <tt>\raisebox</tt> is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..26d4e22d60b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-303.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \ref</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\ref</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\ref{key}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\ref</tt> command produces the number of the sectional unit, equation
+ number, ... of the corresponding
+<a href="ltx-252.html"><tt>\label</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+Bibliographic references using the
+<a href="ltx-73.html"><tt>\thebibliography</tt></a>
+mechanism obtain their number or label using
+<a href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
+<p>
+The <tt>\ref</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-13.html">Cross References</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a4c495c3194
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-304.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rm</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rm</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Roman typeface (default).
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..82de9076180
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-305.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \roman</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\roman</font></h1>
+
+ <tt>\roman{counter}</tt>
+<p>
+ This command causes the current value of <tt>counter</tt> to be printed
+ in roman numerals.
+ The <tt>\roman</tt> command causes lower case roman numerals, i.e.,
+ i, ii, iii, ..., while the <tt>\Roman</tt> command causes upper case roman
+ numerals, i.e., I, II, III...
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c9af088929a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-306.html
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \rule</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\rule</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\rule[raise-height]{width}{height}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\rule</tt> command generates a rectangular "blob of ink."
+ It can be used to produce horizontal or vertical lines. The arguments
+ are defined as follows.
+ <ul>
+ <li><TT>raise-height</TT> specifies how high to raise the rule (optional)
+ <li><TT>width</TT> specifies the length of the rule (mandatory)
+ <li><TT>height</TT> specifies the height of the rule (mandatory)
+ </ul>
+ The default value for <tt>raise-height</tt> is zero; a negative value
+ lowers the rule.
+<p>
+ The reference point of the rule box is the lower left-hand corner.
+<p>
+ A rule box of zero width may be used as a "strut" which is invisible but
+ which causes LaTeX to adjust veritcal spacing to leave room. This can
+ be particularly useful where the
+ <a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a> command cannot be used,
+ for example, within <a href="ltx-115.html">mathematical formulas</a>.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\rule</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 21 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0b3f34506b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-307.html
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \savebox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\savebox</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\sbox{cmd}{text}</tt><br>
+ <tt>\savebox{cmd}[width][pos]{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ These commands typeset <tt>text</tt> in a box just as for
+ <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a> or
+ <a href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></a>.
+ However, instead of printing the resulting box, they save it in
+ the LaTeX command
+ <tt>cmd</tt>, which must have been declared with
+ <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>.
+ The saved <tt>text</tt> is accessed by a
+ <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\sbox</tt> and <tt>\savebox</tt> commands are
+ <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> with the usual
+ rules for scope.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\sbox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>;
+ the <tt>\savebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-337.html"><tt>\usebox</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..805a66a89c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-308.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sc</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sc</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Small caps typeface.
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1096770416b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-309.html
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \scriptsize</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\scriptsize</font></h1>
+ Second smallest of 10 typefaces available.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..462e493dc11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-31.html
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX description</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">description</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ <tt>\begin{description}
+ <a href="item.html">\item[label]</a> First item
+ \item[label] Second item
+ ....
+ \end{description}</tt>
+</pre>
+ The description environment is used to make labeled lists. The <tt>label</tt>
+ is bold face and flushed right. The text of the <tt>\item</tt> command
+ is indented.
+<p>
+ Typical usage is for descriptive lists
+ or lists of definitions; the <tt>label</tt> is then the name of the
+ item being described or defined.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a><br>
+See also <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bb877e8b1d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-310.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setcounter</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setcounter</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\setcounter{counter}{value}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\setcounter</tt> command sets the value of the specified
+ <tt>counter</tt> to that
+ specified by the <tt>value</tt> argument.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..18259f9cd11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-311.html
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settoheight</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settoheight</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\settoheight{len-cmd}{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\settoheight</tt> command sets the value of a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>,
+ which is specified as the first argument, equal to
+ the maximum height of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font.
+<p>
+ For example,
+<pre>
+ <tt>\settoheight{\baselineskip}{Xanadu}
+ <a href="ltx-88.html">\setlength</a>{\baselineskip}{1.5\baselineskip}</tt>
+</pre>
+would set the value of <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a>
+to 1.5 times the height of the capital "X".
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2935570cb4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-312.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settodepth</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settodepth</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\settodepth{len-cmd}{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\settodepth</tt> command sets the value of a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>,
+ which is specified as the first argument, equal to
+ the depth (distance below the baseline)
+ of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font.
+<p>
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e6b486554a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-313.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sf</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sf</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Sans serif typeface.
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..bacb8e69752
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-314.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \shortstack</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\shortstack</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\shortstack[position]{ ... \\ ... \\ ... }</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\shortstack</tt> command produces a stack of objects. The valid
+ positions are:
+<ul>
+<li><TT>r</TT> Moves the objects to the right of the stack
+<li><TT>l</TT> Moves the objects to the left of the stack
+<li><TT>c</TT> Moves the objects to the center of the stack (default)
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+<A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..00db42b0cfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-315.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \signature</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\signature</font></h1>
+<tt>\signature{Your Name}</tt>
+<p>
+ Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
+ space for your signature. Items that should go on separate lines
+ should be separated by
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> commands.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
+See <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..802fbac2f48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-316.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sl</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sl</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Slanted typeface.
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address></body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c0fc3c21b49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-317.html
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \small</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\small</font></h1>
+ Slightly smaller than default typeface size.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7bd0ca09280
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-318.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \smallskip</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\smallskip</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\smallskip</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\smallskip</tt> command is equivalent to
+ <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>{\smallskipamount}</tt> where
+ <tt>\smallskipamount</tt> is determined by the document style.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..65392112407
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-319.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \sqrt</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\sqrt</font></h1>
+ <tt>\sqrt[root]{arg}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\sqrt</tt> command produces the square root (radical) symbol with the
+ argument as radicand. The
+ optional argument, root, determines what root to produce, i.e. the
+ cube root of x+y would be typed as <tt>$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$</tt>.
+<p>
+The radical sign is <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size</a>, that is,
+it is made larger if the radicand is, for example, a built-up fraction.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+<A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.<br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4340d27eaa3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-323.html
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \telephone</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\telephone</font></h1>
+ <tt>\telephone{number}</tt>
+<p>
+ This is your telephone number. This only appears if the firstpage
+ pagestyle is selected.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..204ec9e4fb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-324.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \thanks</title>
+</head><body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\thanks</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\thanks{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\thanks</tt> command produces a footnote to the title.
+<p>
+It is typically used as part of the argument of a
+<a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a> or
+<a href="ltx-203.html"><tt>\author</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+For example
+<pre>
+ <tt>\title{Work in Progress
+ \thanks{Contribution No. 1 from our lab}}
+ \author{A. Author\thanks{Supported by a grant}}</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
+<A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A>.<br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f247468637f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-328.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tiny</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tiny</font></h1>
+ Smallest of 10 typefaces available. All fonts may not be available in
+ this size.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 29 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..74902fc9774
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-329.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \title</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\title</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\title{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\title</tt> command declares <tt>text</tt> to be the title. Use
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> to tell
+ LaTeX where to start a new line in a long title.
+<p>
+ A footnote to a title is produced with the
+ <a href="ltx-324.html"><tt>\thanks</tt></a> command.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-131.html">Page Styles</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-78.html">Titlepage Environment</a><br>
+See also <A href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..49513cecc87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-330.html
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Help On LaTeX \today</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\today</font></h1>
+The command <tt>\today</tt> generates the current date in the
+format Month dd, year.
+<hr>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..917ba0a38ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-331.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tt</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tt</font></h1>
+<p>
+ Typewriter typeface.
+<p>
+This is version 2.09; see also
+ <a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e font selection</a><br>
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-177.html">Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c98b9e94dac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-332.html
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \twocolumn</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\twocolumn</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\twocolumn</tt> declaration starts a new page and produces two-column
+ output.
+<p>
+ This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-22.html">Document Styles</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-284.html"><tt>\onecolumn</tt></a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..38dabf514d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-335.html
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underbrace</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underbrace</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\underbrace{formula}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\underbrace</tt> command generates a brace underneath
+ the <tt>formula</tt>; math mode.
+<p>
+To "label" the underbrace, use a <a href="ltx-179.html">subscript</a>.
+<hr>
+See also:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ceefcd24112
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-336.html
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \underline</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\underline</font></h1>
+ <tt>\underline{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\underline</tt> command causes the argument text to be underlined. This
+ command can be used in math mode, paragraph mode, and LR mode.
+<p>
+This command is <a href="fragile.html">fragile</a> although the
+<a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a> command is robust.
+<hr>
+See also:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 July 1995.
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f4e30f67bc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-337.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usebox</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usebox</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\usebox{cmd}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ Prints the box most recently saved in <tt>cmd by</tt> a
+<a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt> or <tt>\sbox</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+ The <tt>\usebox</tt> command is <a href="fragile.html">robust</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+See <a href="ltx-277.html"><tt>\newsavebox</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-307.html"><tt>\savebox</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..64db37f4f6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-338.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \usecounter</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\usecounter</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\usecounter{counter}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\usecounter</tt> command is used in the second argument of the
+ <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a>
+ to allow the counter specified to be used to number the
+ list items.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-260.html">list environment</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 18 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a1c52a55300
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-339.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \value</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\value</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\value{counter}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\value</tt> command produces the value of the counter named in the
+ mandatory argument. It can be used where LaTeX expects an integer or
+ number, such as the second argument of a
+ <a href="ltx-310.html"><tt>\setcounter</tt></a> or
+ <a href="ltx-195.html"><tt>\addtocounter</tt></a> command, or in
+<pre>
+ <tt>\hspace{\value{foo}<a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">\parindent}</a></tt>
+</pre>
+ It is useful for doing arithmetic with counters.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-3.html">Counters</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0f32746eb98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-340.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vdots</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vdots</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\vdots</tt> command produces a vertical ellipsis.<br>
+ Can be used only in math mode.
+<hr>
+See also:
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-207.html">\cdots</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-218.html">\ddots</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-256.html">\ldots</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-340.html">\vdots</A>
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</A>,
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>.
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..93240e1509c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-341.html
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vector</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vector</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\vector</tt> command draws an arrow of the specified length and slope
+ with the arrow head at the opposite end of the line from the
+ reference point (see <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a>).
+<p>
+The slope is determined by <tt>(x-slope,y-slope)</tt> which are signed
+integers of magnitude less than or equal to 4 and which have no common
+divisor except for plus or minus one; For example (1,0) is a horizontal
+arrow pointing right; (1,1) gives a slope of
+45 degress; (0,1) is a vertical arrow pointing up; (-1,1) is at 135 degrees.
+<p>
+The <strong>horizontal</strong> extent of the arrow is given by the
+<tt>length</tt> parameter, except in the case of a vertical arrow in
+which case <tt>length</tt> specifies the vertical height.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">picture</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..65cad2f1b0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-342.html
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \verb</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\verb</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\verb char literal_text char</tt><br>
+or<br>
+ <tt>\verb*char literal_text char</tt><p>
+
+ Typesets <tt>literal_text</tt> exactly as typed,
+ including special characters
+ and spaces, using a typewriter (<tt>\tt</tt>) font. There may be no
+ space between <tt>\verb</tt> or <tt>\verb*</tt>
+ and <tt>char</tt> (space is shown here only for
+ clarity). The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed
+ as "visual" spaces, i.e., a short, squat "u".
+<p>
+ Any <tt>char</tt> except a space (or a <tt>*</tt> for the <tt>\verb</tt>
+ form) may be chosen as the delimiter. Thus, the input
+<pre>
+ \verb1This!is?the##1 verbatim ...
+</pre>
+would produce<p>
+
+<tt>This!is?the##</tt> verbatim ...
+<p>
+The <tt>\verb</tt> command may <strong>not</strong> be used in the argument
+of another command. For example, it cannot be used in the text of a
+<a href="ltx-141.html">sectioning command</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-79.html">verbatim</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7b0b0ec05e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-345.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vfill</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vfill</font></h1>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\vfill</tt> fill command produces a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> which can stretch or
+ shrink vertically. It is equivalent to a blank line followed by
+ <tt><a href="ltx-347.html">\vspace</a>\fill</tt>. It should be used only
+ in <a href="ltx-130.html">paragraph mode</a>.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6e3bc2ba17e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-346.html
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vline</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vline</font></h1>
+ The <tt>\vline</tt> command will draw a vertical line extending the full height
+ and depth of its row. An <tt><a href="ltx-238.html">\hfill</a></tt> command
+ can be used to move the line
+ to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression.
+<hr>
+See also: <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>,
+<A href="ltx-68.html">tabular</A><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 31 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d643dc901ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-347.html
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \vspace</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\vspace</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\vspace[*]{length}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\vspace</tt> command adds vertical space. The length of the space can
+ be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands, i.e., points,
+ inches, etc. You can add negative as well as positive space with an
+ <tt>\vspace</tt> command.
+<p>
+ If <tt>\vspace</tt> appears in the middle of a paragraph the space
+ is added after the line containing it.
+<p>
+ LaTeX removes vertical space that comes at the end of a page. If you
+ don't want LaTeX to remove this space, include the optional *
+ argument. Then the space is never removed.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fe16097d0f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-37.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedright</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedright</font></h1>
+ This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+ corresponds to the <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a>. This
+ declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
+ parbox.
+<p>
+ Unlike the flushleft environment, the <tt>\raggedright</tt> command does not
+ start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+ units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+ declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
+ environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-228.html">flushleft environment</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a9a1a1ca3c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-39.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \raggedleft</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\raggedleft</font></h1>
+<p>
+ This <a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+ corresponds to the <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a>. This
+ declaration can be used inside an environment such as quote or in a
+ parbox.
+<p>
+ Unlike the flushright environment, the <tt>\raggedleft</tt> command does not
+ start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
+ units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
+ declaration must contain the blank line or <tt>\end</tt> command (of an
+ environment like quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-229.html">flushright environment</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3acd2e45614
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-401.html
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Accents</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Accents</font></h1>
+The rules differ somewhat depending whether you are in
+<a href="ltx-130.html">text mode</a>, <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math
+mode</a>, or the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>
+
+<h2>Text mode</h2>
+The following accents may be placed on letters. Although "o" is used in
+most of the example, the accents may be placed on any letter.
+Accents may even be placed above a "missing" letter; for example,
+<tt>\~{}</tt> produces a tilde over a blank space.
+<p>
+The following commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br>
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\`{o}</tt> produces a grave accent, &ograve;
+<li><tt>\'{o}</tt> produces an acute accent, &oacute;
+<li><tt>\^{o}</tt> produces a circumflex, &ocirc;
+<li><tt>\"{o}</tt> produces an umlaut or dieresis, &ouml;
+<li><tt>\H{o}</tt> produces a long Hungarian umlaut
+<li><tt>\~{o}</tt> produces a tilde, &otilde;
+<li><tt>\c{c}</tt> produces a cedilla, &ccedil;
+<li><tt>\={o}</tt> produces a macron accent (a bar over the letter)
+<li><tt>\b{o}</tt> produces a bar under the letter
+<li><tt>\.{o}</tt> produces a dot over the letter
+<li><tt>\d{o}</tt> produces a dot under the letter
+<li><tt>\u{o}</tt> produces a breve over the letter
+<li><tt>\v{o}</tt> produces a "v" over the letter
+<li><tt>\t{oo}</tt> produces a "tie" (inverted u) over the two letters
+</ul>
+<p>
+Note that the letters "i" and "j" require special treatment when
+they are given accents because it is often desirable to replace the
+dot with the accent. For this purpose, the commands <tt>\i</tt> and
+<tt>\j</tt> can be used to produce dotless letters.<p>
+For example,
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\^{\i}</tt> should be used for i, circumflex, &icirc;
+<li><tt>\"{\i}</tt> should be used for i, umlaut, &iuml;
+</ul>
+
+<h2><a name="math">Math mode</a></h2>
+Several of the above and some similar accents can also be
+produced in math mode. The following commands may be used <strong>only</strong>
+in math mode.
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\hat{o}</tt> is similar to the circumflex (cf. <tt>\^</tt>)
+<li><tt>\widehat{oo}</tt> is a wide version of <tt>\hat</tt> over several letters
+<li><tt>\check{o}</tt> is a vee or check (cf. <tt>\v</tt>)
+<li><tt>\tilde{o}</tt> is a tilde (cf. <tt>\~</tt>)
+<li><tt>\widetilde{oo}</tt> is a wide version
+ of <tt>\tilde</tt> over several letters
+<li><tt>\acute{o}</tt> is an acute accent (cf. <tt>\`</tt>)
+<li><tt>\grave{o}</tt> is a grave accent (cf. <tt>\'</tt>)
+<li><tt>\dot{o}</tt> is a dot over the letter (cf. <tt>\.</tt>)
+<li><tt>\ddot{o}</tt> is a double dot over the letter
+<li><tt>\breve{o}</tt> is a breve (cf. <tt>\u</tt>)
+<li><tt>\bar{o}</tt> is a macron (cf. <tt>\=</tt>)
+<li><tt>\vec{o}</tt> is a vector (arrow) over the letter
+</ul>
+
+<h2><a href="ltx-58.html">Tabbing environment</a></h2>
+Some of the accent marks used in running text have other uses in
+the <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>. In that
+case they can be created with the following command:
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\a'</tt> for an acute accent
+<li><tt>\a`</tt> for a grave accent
+<li><tt>\a=</tt> for a macron accent
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Related topics:
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..500c3d7b99a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-402.html
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Non-English characters and ligatures</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Non-English characters and ligatures</font></h1>
+
+These commands may be used only in paragraph or LR mode.<br>
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\ae</tt> small ae ligature (diphthong), &aelig;
+<li><tt>\AE</tt> capital ae ligature, &AElig;
+<li><tt>\oe</tt> small oe ligature
+<li><tt>\OE</tt> capital OE ligature
+<li><tt>\aa</tt> small a, ring, &aring;
+<li><tt>\AA</tt> capital A, ring, &Aring;
+<li><tt>\o</tt> small o, slash, &oslash;
+<li><tt>\O</tt> capital O, slash, &Oslash;
+<li><tt>\ss</tt> German sz ligature, &szlig;
+</ul>
+<p>
+<h2>Non-English punctuation</h2>
+An inverted "question mark" is made by <tt>?`</tt>. It will also be
+generated by a <tt>&gt;</tt> in text mode.
+<p>
+An inverted "exclamation point" is made by <tt>!`</tt>. It will also be
+generated by a <tt>&lt;</tt> in text mode.
+<hr>
+Related topics:
+<ul>
+<li> <a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a>,
+<li> <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
+<li> <a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0f74a6048f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-403.html
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Delimiters</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Delimiters</font></h1>
+Delimiters are objects which act logically like parentheses. These can
+be used only in math mode.
+<p>
+The delimiters recognized by LaTeX include
+<ul>
+<li><tt>(</tt> (left parenthesis)
+<li><tt>)</tt> (right parenthesis)
+<li><tt>[</tt> (left bracket)
+<li><tt>]</tt> (right bracket)
+<li><tt>\{</tt> (left brace)
+<li><tt>\}</tt> (right brace)
+<li><tt>|</tt> (vertical line)
+<li><tt>\vert</tt> (vertical line)
+<li><tt>\|</tt> (double vertical lines)
+<li><tt>\Vert</tt> (double vertical lines)
+<li><tt>/</tt> (slash)
+<li><tt><a href="ltx-164.html">\backslash</a></tt> (backslash)
+<li><tt>\langle</tt> (left angle bracket)
+<li><tt>\rangle</tt> (right angle bracket)
+<li><tt>\uparrow</tt> (uparrow)
+<li><tt>\downarrow</tt> (down arrow)
+<li><tt>\updownarrow</tt> (up/down arrow)
+</ul>
+
+<h2><a name="big">Making delimiters the right size</a></h2>
+Delimiters in formulas should be big enough to "fit" around the formulas
+they delimit (for example arround arrays).
+To obtain "stretchable" delimiters (LaTeX makes them the
+appropriate size) type a <tt>\left</tt> or <tt>\right</tt> command before
+the delimiter. <tt>\left</tt> and <tt>\right</tt> commands must come in
+matching pairs, although the delimiters themselves need not be the same.
+Thus, <pre> \left \{ ... \right \[ </pre> produces a legal pair.
+In cases where only one delimiter is desired, it
+is possible to make the matching delimiter "invisible" by typing a
+period (<tt>.</tt>) after the command, i.e.,
+<tt>\left.</tt> or <tt>\right.</tt>.
+<p>
+In an <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray environment</a> the matching <tt>\left</tt>
+and <tt>\right</tt> cannot be split between lines and it may be necessary to
+use an "invisible" <tt>\right.</tt> and <tt>\left.</tt> to terminate and
+begin parts on different lines. In this case a second problem may arise,
+since the size of the delimiters will be chosen only for the
+<strong>local part</strong>, so that the size of the <strong>visible</strong>
+"left" and "right" delimiters might not match.
+The solution is to trick LaTeX into thinking
+that both parts have the same vertical height. This can be done by placing
+a strut, that is a zero-width <a href="ltx-306.html"><tt>\rule</tt></a>. It
+can also be accomplished with the <tt>\vphantom</tt> command, which I have
+not found documented, but which appears to work.
+<p>
+<pre><tt>\vphantom{construct}</tt></pre>
+creates a zero-width object with the height of <tt>construct</tt>. The
+argument can contain things such as <a href="ltx-235.html"><tt>\frac</tt></a>
+or the <a href="ltx-408.html">variable size math symbols</a> and should
+be chosen according to what is in the section with the delimiter you want to match.
+
+<h2>Some examples</h2>
+<h3>A six-j symbol</h3>
+<pre>
+ <tt>\[ \left<a href="ltx-164.html">\{</a>
+ \begin{<a href="ltx-202.html">array</a>}{ccc}
+ a &amp; b &amp; c <a href="ltx-181.html">\\</a>
+ d &amp; e &amp; f \end{array}
+ \right<a href="ltx-164.html">\}</a> \]</tt>
+</pre>
+This should be displayed something like (insofar as it can be rendered in
+"ascii art"):
+<pre>
+ ( a b c )
+ - -
+ ( d e f )
+</pre>
+Note that the <tt>\[ ... \]</tt> set this off as <a href="ltx-421.html">
+Display Math</a>, and that the <a href="ltx-202.html">Array Environment</a>
+is used to generate the three centered columns inside the braces.
+<h3>A "multiple choice" equation</h3>
+<pre>
+ <tt>\[ f(x) =
+ \left\{ \begin{array}{l}
+ 0, x &lt; 0 \\ 1, x = 0 \\
+ 2, x &gt; 0 \end{array} \right. \]</tt>
+</pre>
+will be displayed as
+<pre>
+<tt> ( 0, x &lt; 0
+ f(x) = - 1, x = 0
+ ( 2, x &gt; 0</tt>
+</pre>
+Note that the "invisible" <tt>\right</tt> delimiter is specified using
+a "period".
+<hr>
+See also:
+See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math formulas</a>,
+<li><a href="ltx-202.html">Arrays</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols (sums, integrals, etc.)</a>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9016b0b2018
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-404.html
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Binary and relational opertors</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Binary and relational operators</font></h1>
+Some "math" symbols are obtained by typing the corresponding keyboard
+character. Examples include
+<pre> + - = &lt; &gt; </pre>
+<strong>Note:</strong> plus, minus, and equal sign may be used in
+either text or math mode, but &lt; and &gt; are math mode only
+(they produce inverted exclamation and question marks, respectively,
+in text mode).
+<p>
+The following commands may be used only in math mode.
+
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\pm</tt> plus or minus sign
+<li><tt>\mp</tt> minus or plus sign
+<li><tt>\times</tt> times (an "x")
+<li><tt>\div</tt> divided by sign
+<li><tt>\ast</tt> an asterisk (centered)
+<li><tt>\star</tt> a five-point star (centered)
+<li><tt>\bullet</tt> a bullet
+<li><tt>\circ</tt> an open bullet
+<li><tt>\cdot</tt> a centered dot (see also,
+ <a href="ltx-207.html"><tt>\cdots</tt></a>)
+<p>
+<li><tt>\leq</tt> less than or equal to
+<li><tt>\ll</tt> much less than
+<li><tt>\subset</tt> is a subset of
+<li><tt>\geq</tt> greater than or equal to
+<li><tt>\gg</tt> much greater than
+<li><tt>\equiv</tt> equivalence symbol
+<li><tt>\sim</tt> similar to
+<li><tt>\simeq</tt> similar or equal to
+<li><tt>\approx</tt> approximately equal to
+<li><tt>\neq</tt> not equal to
+<li><tt>\per</tt> "perpendicular to" symbols
+<li><tt>\propto</tt> proportional to
+</ul>
+<p>
+Note that "greater than" and "less than" are obtained simply by
+entering <tt>&gt;</tt> and <tt>&lt;</tt>.
+<p>
+A slash, indicating <a name=not>"not"</a> can be placed through a symbol
+(or a letter) with the <tt>\not</tt> command. For example, not less than is
+<pre> \not&lt;
+</pre>
+and not less than or equal to is
+<pre> \not\leq
+</pre>
+If the slash isn't properly positioned it can be moved by putting a
+<a href="ltx-118.html">math mode spacing command</a> between the <tt>\not</tt>
+and the symbol.
+<p>
+Related topics:
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.)
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2d7bda376e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-405.html
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Greek letters</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Greek letters</font></h1>
+
+These commands may be used only in math mode.
+<h2>Lower case</h2>
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\alpha</tt>
+<li><tt>\beta</tt>
+<li><tt>\gamma</tt>
+<li><tt>\delta</tt>
+<li><tt>\epsilon</tt>
+<li><tt>\varepsilon</tt> (variation, script-like)
+<li><tt>\zeta</tt>
+<li><tt>\eta</tt>
+<li><tt>\theta</tt>
+<li><tt>\vartheta</tt> (variation, script-like)
+<li><tt>\iota</tt>
+<li><tt>\kappa</tt>
+<li><tt>\lambda</tt>
+<li><tt>\mu</tt>
+<li><tt>\nu</tt>
+<li><tt>\xi</tt>
+<li><tt>\pi</tt>
+<li><tt>\varpi</tt> (variation)
+<li><tt>\rho</tt>
+<li><tt>\varrho</tt> (variation, with the tail)
+<li><tt>\sigma</tt>
+<li><tt>\varsigma</tt> (variation, script-like)
+<li><tt>\tau</tt>
+<li><tt>\upsilon</tt>
+<li><tt>\phi</tt>
+<li><tt>\varphi</tt> (variation, script-like)
+<li><tt>\chi</tt>
+<li><tt>\psi</tt>
+<li><tt>\omega</tt>
+</ul>
+<h2>Capital letters</h2>
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\Gamma</tt>
+<li><tt>\Delta</tt>
+<li><tt>\Theta</tt>
+<li><tt>\Lambda</tt>
+<li><tt>\Xi</tt>
+<li><tt>\Pi</tt>
+<li><tt>\Sigma</tt>
+<li><tt>\Upsilon</tt>
+<li><tt>\Phi</tt>
+<li><tt>\Psi</tt>
+<li><tt>\Omega</tt>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also:
+See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-401.html">Accents</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-402.html">Ligatures and Non-English symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..24c60007829
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-406.html
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Arrows</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Arrows</font></h1>
+Latex provides commands for all sorts of arrows. The following commands
+are used only in math mode.
+<p>
+In general the command names are created from "left", "right", "up", or
+"down". "leftright" gives a double headed arrow.
+Prefacing with "long" gives a longer arrow. Capitalizing the
+first letter gives a double-shanked arrow.
+<p>
+Examples are
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\leftarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\Leftarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\longleftarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\Longleftarrow</tt>
+<p>
+<li><tt>\rightarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\Rightarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\longrightarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\Longrightarrow</tt>
+<p>
+<li><tt>\leftrightarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\Leftrightarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\longleftrightarrow</tt>
+<p>
+<li><tt>\uparrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\downarrow</tt>
+<li><tt>\Uparrow</tt>
+<p>
+<li><tt>\nearrow</tt> points from southwest to northeast
+<li><tt>\searrow</tt> points from northwest to southeast
+<li><tt>\swarrow</tt> points from northeast to southwest
+<li><tt>\nwarrow</tt> points from southeast to northwest
+</ul>
+The <a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> command is
+useful for putting things over or under your arrow.
+<hr>
+See also:
+See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.)
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jull 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e2340140b50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-407.html
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Miscellaneous symbols</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Miscellaneous symbols</font></h1>
+
+<h2>Some symbols for math</h2>
+The following symbols are also used only in math mode
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\aleph</tt> Hebrew aleph
+<li><tt>\hbar</tt> h-bar, Planck's constant
+<li><tt>\imath</tt> variation on "i"; no dot
+<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\i</tt></a></ul>
+<li><tt>\jmath</tt> variation on "j"; no dot
+<ul><li>See also <a href="ltx-401.html"><tt>\j</tt></a></ul>
+<li><tt>\ell</tt> script (loop) "l"
+<li><tt>\wp</tt> fancy script lowercase "P"
+<li><tt>\Re</tt> script capital "R" ("Real")
+<li><tt>\Im</tt> script capital "I" ("Imaginary")
+<li><tt>\prime</tt> prime (also obtained by typing <tt>'</tt>)
+<li><tt>\nabla</tt> inverted capital Delta
+<li><tt>\surd</tt> radical (square root) symbol
+<li><tt>\angle</tt> angle symbol
+<li><tt>\forall</tt> "for all" (inverted A)
+<li><tt>\exists</tt> "exists" (left-facing E)
+<li><a href="ltx-164.html"><tt>\backslash</tt></a> backslash
+<li><tt>\partial</tt> partial derivative symbol
+<li><tt>\infty</tt> infinity symbol
+<li><tt>\triangle</tt> open triangle symbol
+<li><tt>\Box</tt> open square
+<li><tt>\Diamond</tt> open diamond
+<p>
+<li><tt>\flat</tt> music: flat symbol
+<li><tt>\natural</tt> music: natural symbol
+<li><tt>\sharp</tt> music: sharp symbol
+<p>
+<li><tt>\clubsuit</tt> playing cards: club suit symbol
+<li><tt>\diamondsuit</tt> playing cards: diamond suit symbol
+<li><tt>\heartsuit</tt> playing cards: heart suit symbol
+<li><tt>\spadesuit</tt> playing cards: space suit symbol
+</ul>
+
+<h2>Some other symbols</h2>
+The following symbols can be used in any mode.
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\dag</tt> dagger
+<li><tt>\ddag</tt> double dagger
+<li><tt>\S</tt> section symbol
+<li><tt>\P</tt> paragraph symbol
+<li><tt>\copyright</tt> copyright symbol
+<li><tt>\pounds</tt> British pound sterling symbol
+</ul>
+
+<h2>Calligraphic style letters</h2>
+Twenty-six calligraphic letters are provided (the upper case alphabet). These
+can only be used in math mode.<p>
+In LaTeX 2.09 they are produced with the <tt>\cal</tt>
+<a href="declarations.html">declaration</a>
+<pre>
+ <tt>${\cal A}$</tt>
+</pre>
+
+ In LaTeX2e they are obtained with the <tt>\mathcal</tt> command:
+<pre>
+ <tt>$\mathcal{CAL}$</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See also:
+See also <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-405.html">Greek letters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a> (sums, integrals, etc.)
+<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt></a> (putting things above
+ other things)
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 7 Jul 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ede35a461ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-408.html
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Variable size symbols</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Variable size symbols</font></h1>
+The size of some mathematical symbols, notably summation signs, product signs, and
+integral signs, depends on the environment in which they
+appear (i.e., <tt>displaymath</tt> as opposed to <tt>math</tt> environments;
+see <a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a> and
+<a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a>).
+<p>
+These include
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\sum</tt> a summation sign (capital sigma)
+<li><tt>\prod</tt> a product (capital pi)
+<li><tt>\coprod</tt> a coproduct (inverted capital pi)
+<li><tt>\int</tt> an integral sign
+<li><tt>\oint</tt> a surface (circular) integral sign
+<li><tt>\bigcup</tt> big "U"
+<li><tt>\bigcap</tt> big inverted "U"
+<li><tt>\bigvee</tt> big "V"
+<li><tt>\bigwedge</tt> big inverted "V"
+<li><tt>\bigodot</tt> big "O" with dot at center
+<li><tt>\bigotimes</tt> big "O" with cross inside
+<li><tt>\bigoplus</tt> big "O" with a + inside
+<li><tt>\biguplus</tt> big "U" with a + inside
+</ul>
+The <a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a> command also produces a variable
+size symbol appropriate for the size of hte radicand argument.
+<p>
+<p>
+The "limits" associated with these symbols are entered as
+<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a> for entries appearing below the
+symbol and as <a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a> for entries appearing
+above the symbol.
+For example the sum from n=0 to infinity of x<sub>n</sub> would be entered as
+<pre>
+ \sum_{n=0}^{<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a>} x_{n}
+</pre>
+The actual placement of the limits depends on whether this
+is in <tt>displaymath</tt> mode in which case they are placed below/above
+or in <tt>math</tt> mode in running text in which case they are placed as regular
+subscripts and superscripts.
+<p>
+Note that it is possible to treat several of these symbols (a common example
+would be a double sum) as a single symbol for placing limits above and/or
+below by using the <a href="stackrel.html#mathop"><tt>\mathop</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+"Hats" and "tildes" over symbols which stretch (as best they can) to
+the correct size for their arguments are produced by
+<a href="ltx-401.html#math"><tt>\widehat</tt> and <tt>\widetilde</tt></a>.
+<hr>
+Related topics:
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a> can be made variable sized
+<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math fonts and styles</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-409.html">Math function symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\left</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-403.html#big"><tt>\right</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-319.html"><tt>\sqrt</tt></a>
+<li><a href="stackrel.html"><tt>\stackrel</tt> and <tt>\mathop</tt></a>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..468ee7918d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-409.html
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Math function symbols</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math function symbols</font></h1>
+Functions like "log" or "cos" are normally used in math mode. However, in
+math mode strings of letters are treated as a product of variables, which
+would normally be displayed in math italics rather than a text font which
+would be appropriate for these functions. To
+get proper display of such functions they are generated with LaTeX commands.
+<p>
+Some of these commands are
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\arccos</tt>
+<li><tt>\arcsin</tt>
+<li><tt>\arctan</tt>
+<li><tt>\cos</tt>
+<li><tt>\cosh</tt>
+<li><tt>\cot</tt>
+<li><tt>\coth</tt>
+<li><tt>\csc</tt>
+<li><tt>\deg</tt>
+<li><tt>\det</tt>
+<li><tt>\dim</tt>
+<li><tt>\exp</tt>
+<li><tt>\gcd</tt>
+<li><tt>\hom</tt>
+<li><tt>\inf</tt>
+<li><tt>\ker</tt>
+<li><tt>\lg</tt>
+<li><tt>\lim</tt>
+<li><tt>\liminf</tt>
+<li><tt>\limsup</tt>
+<li><tt>\ln</tt>
+<li><tt>\log</tt>
+<li><tt>\max</tt>
+<li><tt>\min</tt>
+<li><tt>\sec</tt>
+<li><tt>\sin</tt>
+<li><tt>\sinh</tt>
+<li><tt>\sup</tt>
+<li><tt>\tan</tt>
+<li><tt>\tanh</tt>
+</ul>
+Two commands are provided for the "modulus" function
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\bmod</tt>
+<li><tt>\pmod{}</tt>
+</ul>
+The former would be used to write "a mod b" as
+<pre> a \bmod b
+</pre>
+and the latter, which requires an argument that is displayed in parentheses,
+would be used to write "n = i (mod j)" as
+<pre> n = i \pmod{j}
+</pre>
+
+<p>
+Related topics:
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational operators</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-403.html">Delimiters</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 25 April 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a2f26a22b28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-420.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Abstract Environment</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Abstract environment</font></h1>
+In the article or report <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a>, the
+abstract is produced by the abstract environment:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{abstract}
+ Abstract text, set in the usual
+ LaTeX paragraph mode.
+
+ An empy line, for example, specifies
+ a new paragraph
+ \end{abstract}</tt>
+</pre>
+The abstract is typically set with a narrower page margin.
+
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-27.html">LaTeX environments</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8f92d8e2580
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-421.html
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Displaymath</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Displaymath</font></h1>
+
+ There are four environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
+ <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math</a>,
+ displaymath, <a href="ltx-223.html">eqnarray</a>,
+ and <a href="ltx-224.html">equation</a>.
+ The math environment is for formulas that
+ appear right in the text. The displaymath and equation environments are
+ for formulas that appear on their own line; they differ only insofar
+ as the latter prints an equation number. LaTeX will <strong>not</strong>
+ break lines in displaymath or equation environments unless told to do
+ so with a <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> command.
+<p>
+ The displaymath environment can be entered by
+<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{displaymath}
+ math equation \\
+ second line of math equation
+ \end{displaymath}</tt>
+</pre>
+Because displaymath may be used frequently to display relatively
+short equations, there are convenient alternative forms:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\[ displayed math equation \]</tt>
+</pre>
+or (the following does not seem to be well documented, but appears to work)
+<pre>
+ <tt>$$ dispalyed math equation $$</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html#math">Math environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation environment</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-130.html">LaTeX Modes</a>
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-179.html">Subscripts</A> and
+ <a href="ltx-180.html">Superscripts</a>
+<li><A href="ltx-118.html">Spacing in Math Mode</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-119.html">Math Miscellany</A>
+</ul>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..61de1ff618a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-43.html
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX picture</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Picture environment</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{picture}(width,height)(x-offset,y-offset)
+ ...
+ picture commands
+ ...
+ \end{picture}
+</pre>
+<p>
+ The picture environment allows you to create just about any kind of
+ picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell
+ LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
+ coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point
+ and a minus sign (<tt>-</tt>), for example, 5, 2.3, or -3.1416. A coordinate
+ specifies a length in multiples of the unit length
+ <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>, so if
+ <tt>\unitlength</tt> has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a
+ length of 2.54 centimeters. You can change the value of <tt>\unitlength</tt>
+ anywhere you want, using the
+ <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a> command,
+ but it should be set before the beginning of the picture environment since
+ strange things may happen if you try changing it inside the picture environment.
+<p>
+ A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying the
+ point with x-coordinate = 2.4 and y-coordinate = -5. Coordinates are
+ specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
+ normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a
+ position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
+ parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
+<p>
+ The picture environment has one mandatory argument, which
+ specifies the size of the picture. The environment
+ produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
+ argument's two values.
+<p>
+ The picture environment also has an optional position argument,
+ following the size argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
+ ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square
+ brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
+ the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin).
+ For example, if
+ <a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> has been set to 1mm,
+ the command
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+</pre>
+ produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200
+ millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
+ upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220).
+ Typically one initially omits the optional argument, leaving the
+ origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
+ picture by shifting everything, you just add the appropriate optional
+ argument.
+<p>
+ The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of
+ the picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture
+ really is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the
+ picture, or even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by
+ TeX in determining how much room to leave for it.
+<p>
+ Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the
+ <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a> command. The
+ command
+<pre>
+ \put (11.3,-.3){obj}
+</pre>
+ puts the object specified by <tt>obj</tt> in the picture, with its reference
+ point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
+ objects will be described below.
+<p>
+ The <a href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></a>
+ command creates an LR box. You can put anything in the text
+ argument of the <tt>\put</tt> command that you'd put into the argument
+ of an <a href="ltx-265.html"><tt>\mbox</tt></a>
+ (or related) command. When you do this, the reference point
+ will be the lower left corner of the box.
+<p>
+See also
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-210.html"><tt>\circle</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-216.html"><tt>\dashbox</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-236.html"><tt>\frame</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-237.html"><tt>\framebox</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-257.html"><tt>\line</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-259.html"><tt>\linethickness</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-262.html"><tt>\makebox</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-269.html"><tt>\multiput</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-286.html"><tt>\oval</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-296.html"><tt>\put</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-314.html"><tt>\shortstack</tt></A>
+<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a>
+<li><A href="ltx-341.html"><tt>\vector</tt></A>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6d7c78c1e97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-430.html
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Help On LaTeX Dashes</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Dashes</font></h1>
+LaTeX provides for three sizes of dashes which are indicated by
+typing one, two, or three consecutive dashes in the text.
+<ul>
+<li>a hyphenation dash, as in X-ray, is a single dash
+<li>a dash between limits, as in 1--2, is a double dash
+<li>a parenthetical punctuation --- such as this --- is a triple dash
+</ul>
+Note that this applies to paragraph mode. In math mode each <tt>-</tt>
+is interpreted as a minus sign.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-130.html">Modes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 11 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3dd0c9f8d0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-431.html
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \&lt;space&gt;</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\&lt;space&gt;</font></h1>
+LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after sentences. However, it
+uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a
+sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they
+follow an upper case letter. To let LaTeX know that a period does
+<em>not</em> end a sentence after, for example, an abbreviation, use:
+<p>
+ <tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt>
+<p>
+For example,
+<pre>
+ <tt>Jones, et al.\ (1993) ...</tt>
+</pre>
+Such a space may also be needed after a text-producing command,
+such as one defined with <a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a>.
+As an example, consider
+<pre>
+ <tt>\newcommand{\water}{H$_2$O}
+ \water, \water\ everywhere, but not a drop ...</tt>
+</pre>
+The first <tt>\water</tt> command is terminated by the comma;
+note that LaTeX does not leave a space between the first <tt>\water</tt>
+and the comma -- as desired -- and the trailing space is treated as an
+interword space. However, the second <tt>\water</tt> command
+is terminated by the space, but LaTeX would not leave an extra space after
+this, running "H<sub>2</sub>Owater" into one word, except for the
+trailing <tt>\ </tt>.
+<p>
+An alternate way to indicate the end of a command so that a trailing
+space is interpreted as an interword space is to use braces:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\water, \water{} everywhere, ...</tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-432.html"><tt>\@.</tt></a> for the opposite case<br>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A>,
+ <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and Boxes</a><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 26 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..325075dc2b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-432.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \@</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\@</font></h1>
+LaTeX normally leaves a little extra space after punctuation, such as the
+period which ends a sentence. However, it
+uses a rather simple rule for determining whether a period ends a
+sentence: it assumes that periods end sentences <em>unless</em> they
+follow an upper case letter. To tell LaTeX to insert extra space after
+punctuation which follows an upper case letter, precede the punctuation
+by <tt>\@</tt>.
+<p>
+For example:
+<pre>
+ <tt>It is I\@.</tt>
+</pre>
+would not be considered to be a sentence by LaTeX except for the <tt>\@</tt>.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-431.html"><tt>\&lt;space&gt;</tt></a> for the opposite case<br>
+See also <A href="ltx-99.html">Line and Page Breaking</A><br>
+Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..69134f59518
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-433.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Help On Quotation Marks</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Quotation Marks</font></h1>
+LaTeX distinguishes between left (<tt>`</tt>) and right (<tt>'</tt>)
+quotation marks; the former corresponds to the "grave" generally found
+to the left of the numbers at top of the keyboard, and the latter
+corresponds to the usual single quote mark.
+<p>
+These symbols, by themselves, produce left and right single quotes.
+<p>
+Double quote are produced by typing two in a row: <tt>``text''</tt>.
+<p>
+To separate consecutive single and double quotes, use a
+<a href="ltx-185.html"><tt>\,</tt></a>.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-143.html">Spaces and boxes</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 10 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3851d4499d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-434.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Help Comments in file</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Comments in file</font></h1>
+You can insert comments into the LaTeX input (*.tex) file. Anything following
+a percent sign (<tt>%</tt>) until the end of the line is ignored by the
+LaTeX processor.
+<p>
+In fact, the <tt>%</tt> ends a line without generating a space;
+an end-of-line in LaTeX input is normally equivalent to a space.
+Thus, for example, it allows one to split a word
+over lines without inserting a break. For example
+<pre>
+ <tt> this is an extr%
+ ordinarily long word</tt>
+</pre>
+would produce "this is an extraordinarily long word" with no breaks.
+However, a <strong>command</strong> cannot be split over lines this way.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-164.html">Special Characters</a>,
+<a href="input.html">Input to LaTeX</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d5624173888
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-58.html
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabbing</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabbing</font></h1>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{tabbing}
+ text \= more text \= still more text \= last text \\
+ second row \&gt; \&gt; more \\
+ ....
+ ....
+ \end{tabbing}
+</pre>
+ The tabbing environment provides a way to align text in columns. It
+ works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much the way you do
+ with an ordinary typewriter.
+<p>
+ The <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular</a> environment also aligns text in
+ columns, but there are several important differences.
+ <ul>
+ <li> The tabular environment can be used in any <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a>
+ whereas the tabbing environment can be used only in paragraph
+ <a href="ltx-130.html">mode</a> and it starts a new paragraph.
+<p>
+ <li>The tabular
+ environment generates a box, which LaTeX treats as one (albeit very large)
+ letter; it cannot be split across pages. A long tabbing environment can
+ be split across pages.
+<p>
+ <li>The width of columns in a tabular environment is determined automatically
+ by LaTeX; in the tabbing environment this is done by setting tab stops.
+</ul>
+<H2>Tabbing commands</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-187.html"><tt>\=</tt></A> (set tab)
+<li><A href="ltx-188.html"><tt>\&gt;</tt></A> (advance to next tab stop)
+<li><A href="ltx-189.html"><tt>\&lt;</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-190.html"><tt>\+</tt></A> (indent; move margin right)
+<li><A href="ltx-182.html"><tt>\-</tt></A> (unindent; move margin left)
+<li><A href="ltx-191.html"><tt>\'</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-192.html"><tt>\`</tt></A>
+<li><a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a> (end of line; newline)
+<li><A href="ltx-251.html"><tt>\kill</tt></A> (ignore preceding text; use only
+ for spacing)
+</ul>
+The <a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a> command is useful for
+controlling horizontal space in the tabbing environment.
+<p>
+Note that the commands <tt>\=</tt>, <tt>\'</tt>, and <tt>\`</tt>
+normally produce <a href="ltx-401.html">accents</a> over the subsequent
+letter. These commands are redefined in the tabbing environment;
+in this environment it is possible to get the accents by using
+<tt>\a=</tt>, <tt>\a'</tt>, and <tt>\a`</tt>, respectively.
+</body>
+<hr>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..eb5e016f1b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-67.html
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX table</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">table</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{table}[placement]
+
+ body of the table
+
+ <a href="caption.html">\caption{table title}</a>
+ \end{table}
+</pre>
+<p>
+
+ Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
+ usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
+ Tables will not be split between two pages.
+<p>
+ Note that there is an *-form: <tt>\begin{table*} ... \end{table*}</tt>.
+ This form will put the table in a single column when in two column mode;
+ in one column mode it is identical to the non-* form
+<p>
+ The optional argument [placement] determines where LaTeX will try to
+ place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
+ a float:
+<ul>
+<li><TT>h</TT> Here - at the position in the text where the table
+ environment appears.
+<li><TT>t</TT> Top - at the top of a text page.
+<li><TT>b</TT> Bottom - at the bottom of a text page.
+<li><TT>p</TT> Page of floats - on a separate float page, which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+</ul>
+ The standard report and article styles use the default placement <tt>tbp</tt>.
+<p>
+ The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
+ etc., you wish.
+<p>
+ The <a href="caption.html"><tt>\caption</tt></a> command allows you to title your table.
+<hr>
+ See also <a href="ltx-68.html">tabular environment</a><br>
+ Go to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3926aafd653
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-68.html
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX tabular</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">tabular</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ ...
+ ...
+ \end{tabular}
+</pre>
+
+or
+
+<pre>
+ \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
+ ...
+ ...
+ \end{tabular*}
+</pre>
+Note that the *-form takes an additional <tt>width</tt> mandatory argument
+which specifies the width of the tabular environment; in the regular form
+the width is determined by LaTeX from the contents of the tabular environment.
+<p>
+ These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
+ items, aligned vertically in columns. The mandatory and optional
+ arguments consist of:
+<ul>
+ <li><TT>cols</TT> Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a
+ sequence of the following specifiers, at least one for each
+ of the columns.
+ <ul>
+ <li><tt>l</tt> - A column of left-aligned items.
+ <li><tt>r</tt> - A column of right-aligned items.
+ <li><tt>c</tt> - A column of centered items.
+ <li><tt>p{wd}</tt> - Produces a column which can be multiple lines,
+ with each item typeset in a parbox
+ of width wd. It works as if each item were the argument of a
+ <a href="ltx-294.html"><tt>\parbox[t]{wd}</tt></a>
+ command. However, a
+ <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
+ may not appear in the item, except in
+ the following situations: (i) inside an environment like
+ minipage, array, or tabular, (ii) inside an explicit <tt>\parbox,</tt>
+ or (iii) in the scope of a
+ <a href="ltx-30.html"><tt>\centering</tt></a>,
+ <a href="ltx-300.html"><tt>\raggedleft</tt></a>, or
+ <a href="ltx-301.html"><tt>\raggedright</tt></a>
+ declaration. The latter declarations must appear
+ inside braces or an environment when used in a <tt>p</tt>-column
+ element.
+<p>
+ <li><tt>|</tt> - A vertical line the full height and depth of the
+ environment.
+ <li><tt>@{text}</tt> - This inserts <tt>text</tt> in every row.
+ An @-expression
+ suppresses the intercolumn space normally inserted between
+ columns; any desired space between the inserted text and the
+ adjacent items must be included in <tt>text</tt>.
+ To force the spacing between two columns to be <tt>wdth</tt>,
+ use an <tt>@{\hspace{wdth}}</tt> between the column specifiers.
+ An <tt>\extracolsep{wd}</tt>
+ command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width <tt>wd</tt>
+ to appear to the left of all subsequent columns, until
+ countermanded by another <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command. Unlike
+ ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not
+ suppressed by an @-expression. An <tt>\extracolsep</tt> command can
+ be used only in an @-expression in the <tt>cols</tt> argument.
+ <li><tt>*{num}{cols}</tt> - Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is
+ any positive integer and cols is any list of
+ column-specifiers, which may contain another *-expression.
+ </ul>
+<p>
+ <li><TT>pos</TT> Specifies the vertical position of the whole tabular
+ environment (recall that it is a <a href="ltx-143.html">box</a>).
+ The default is to align the box on the center of the environment.
+ <ul>
+ <li><tt>t</tt> - align on top row
+ <li><tt>b</tt> - align on bottom row
+ </ul>
+<p>
+ <li><TT>width</TT> Specifies the width of the tabular* environment. There
+ must be rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out
+ the specified width.
+</ul>
+
+ Note that <a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
+ must be used to specify the end of each line of the table, except the last.
+ (It must be used after the last line if an
+ <a href="ltx-239.html"><tt>\hline</tt></a> command is used to put a line
+ at the bottom of the table.)
+
+<h2>Aligning on decimal points: an example of the @ specifier</h2>
+In scientific tables it is often desirable to align the columns on a decimal
+point. This can be done using the <tt>@</tt> <tt>col</tt> specifier and
+breaking the number into the integral part in a right-justified column and
+the fractional part in a left-justified column:
+<pre>
+ The following input: will display as:
+
+ <tt>\begin{tabular}{r@{.}l}
+ 3&14159\\ 3.14159
+ 16&2\\ 16.2
+ 123$456\\ \end{tabular} 123.456 </tt>
+</pre>
+Note that the decimal point is replaced by the column separator, <tt>&amp;</tt>
+and that the <tt>@</tt>suppresses the intercolumn space
+
+<h2>Another example: centering and controlling table width</h2>
+LaTeX normally sets the width of the tabular environment to "natural"
+width, i.e., determined from the contents of the columns. For narrow
+tables it is sometimes more pleasing to make them wider. The
+<tt>tabular*</tt> environments allows for setting a width; however, it
+is necessary to have rubber space between colunmns that can expand to the
+specified width. This can often be most easily accomplished by using
+an <tt>\extracolsep{wdth}</tt> command in an @ specifier as shown in the
+example below which sets the table width to 75% of the text width.
+<p>
+This example also centers the table.
+<pre>
+ <tt><a href="ltx-29.html">\begin{center}</a> % put inside center environment
+ \begin{tabular*}{0.75<a href="textwidth.html">\textwidth</a>}%
+ {@{\extracolsep{<a href="ltx-238.html">\fill</a>}}cccr}
+ label 1 &amp; label 2 &amp; label 3 &amp; label 4 \\
+ <a href="ltx-239.html">\hline</a> % put a line under headers
+ item 1 &amp; item 2 &amp; item 3 &amp; item 4 \\
+ ...
+ \end{tabular*}
+ \end{center}</tt>
+</pre>
+<H2>See also</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-214.html">\cline</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-239.html">\hline</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-268.html">\multicolumn</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-346.html">\vline</A>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-67.html">table environment</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-202.html">array environment</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-58.html">tabbing environment</a>.<br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f89c5573985
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-73.html
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX thebibliography</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">thebibliography</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+ <a href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</a>[label]{cite_key}
+ literature citation ...
+ ....
+ \end{thebibliography}
+</pre>
+ The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment produces a bibliography or reference
+ list. In the article style, this reference list is labeled
+ "References"; in the report style, it is labeled "Bibliography".
+<p>
+<TT>widest-label</TT> is text that, when printed, is approximately as wide
+ as the widest item label produced by the <tt>\bibitem</tt> command.
+<p>
+The <tt>thebibliography</tt> environment is similar to the
+<a href="ltx-222.html"><tt>enumerate</tt></a> environment, except that
+items are associated with a <a href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></a>
+command and can be cross-referenced with the
+<A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A> command.
+
+<h2>An example</h2>
+In the text you generate a reference to the bibliographic list as follows:
+<pre>
+ <tt> ... In the running text you might want to refer to
+ Dow &amp; Jones\cite{DandJ} and then again you
+ might not ... </tt>
+</pre>
+The <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></a>
+command will produce a sequence number by default,
+or the text from the optional <tt>label</tt> argument of
+<A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibcite</tt></a>; this latter is useful
+if the style is to use, for example,
+the first three letters of the author's last name and a year, as in Dow29.
+<p>
+The associated item in the bibliography section at the end of the
+article would be generated by
+<pre>
+ \begin{thebibliography}{99}
+ ....
+ \bibitem{DandJ} Dow, W. \& Jones, E.A.,
+ {<a href="ltx-249.html">\it</a> Wall Street Journal},
+ March 29, 1929.
+ ....
+ \end{thebibliography}
+</pre>
+Note that the <tt>widest-label</tt> parameter has been set assuming less than
+100 numbered items in the bibliography. Also note that the key,
+<tt>DandJ</tt>, is what connects the <A href="ltx-211.html"><tt>\cite</tt></A>
+and <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A>.
+<p>
+If <tt>label</tt> is omitted, the numbers are generated sequentially by
+the <A href="ltx-205.html"><tt>\bibitem</tt></A> commands. Many journals
+want these in order of appearance in the text, so you have to sort this
+list to the proper order.
+
+<H2>See also</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-205.html">\bibitem</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-211.html">\cite</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-279.html">\nocite</A>
+<li><a href="ltx-222.html">Enumerate</a> environment
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 17 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c5cf895b2ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-77.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX theorem</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">theorem</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{theorem}
+ theorem text
+ \end{theorem}
+</pre>
+ The theorem environment produces "Theorem x" in boldface followed by
+ your theorem text.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ef866ac8c08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-78.html
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX titlepage</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">titlepage</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{titlepage}
+ text
+ \end{titlepage}
+</pre>
+ The titlepage environment creates a title page, i.e. a page with no
+ printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to
+ be numbered page one. Text and formatting for the title page
+ are left to you.
+<p>
+ The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command comes in handy for
+ title pages. Other useful commands include those that change
+ <a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>, the
+ <a href="ltx-29.html">Centering Environment</a>, and the
+ <a href="ltx-420.html">Abstract Environment</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-263.html"><tt>\maketitle</tt></a> and
+ <a href="ltx-329.html"><tt>\title</tt></a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 16 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3e32e32e9ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-79.html
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX verbatim</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verbatim</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ \begin{verbatim}
+ text
+ \end{verbatim}
+</pre>
+or
+<pre>
+ \begin{verbatim*}
+ text
+ \end{verbatim*}
+</pre>
+ The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment is a paragraph-making environment
+ that gets
+ LaTeX to print exactly what you type in. It turns LaTeX into a
+ typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same effect
+ that they would on a typewriter. The output looks exactly as it
+ looks in the input file.
+<p>
+ The difference between <tt>verbatim</tt> and <tt>verbatim*</tt>
+ is that the latter prints spaces as "visual" spaces, i.e.,
+ a short, squat "u".
+<p>
+ The only text which cannot be placed in the <tt>verbatim</tt>
+ environment is the 14-character sequence "\end{verbatim}".
+<p>
+ The <tt>verbatim</tt> environment may <strong>not</strong> be used
+ in the argument of another command. However, it <strong>can</strong> be
+ placed inside a <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a> which
+ allows you to manipulate it's placement.
+<hr>
+Also see <A href="ltx-342.html">\verb</A><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 4 Dec 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a2e8c47f6fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-81.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX verse</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">verse</font></h1>
+<pre>
+ \begin{verse}
+ text
+ \end{verse}
+</pre>
+ The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
+ other uses for it.
+<hr>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 27 Sep 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1fe9fb6bf71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-82.html
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Footnotes</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Footnotes</font></h1>
+
+ Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced
+ with one command, the <tt>\footnote</tt> command. They can also be produced
+ with two commands, the <tt>\footnotemark</tt> and the <tt>\footnotetext</tt>
+ commands.
+ See the specific commands, below, for information on why you would use one rather
+ than another.
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-231.html">\footnote</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-232.html">\footnotemark</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-234.html">\footnotetext</A>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-233.html">\footnotesize</a> refers to a font size
+</ul>
+ Note that footnotes associated with "floated objects" like
+ <a href="ltx-67.html">tables</a> or <a href="ltx-225.html">figures</a>
+ may have a problem insofar as the footnote might not follow the floated
+ object. This can be alleviated by putting the object inside a
+ <a href="ltx-267.html">minipage environment</a>.
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 22 Nov 1995.
+</address>
+</body></html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e04c6937cb2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-86.html
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Lengths</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Lengths</font></h1>
+<p>
+ A length is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+ as an argument.
+ A length of one inch is specified by typing <tt>1in</tt> or, to specify
+ the same length using metric units, by typing <tt>2.54cm</tt>.
+
+<h2>Units</h2>
+ LaTeX knows about the following common units.
+<ul>
+<li><tt>in</tt> - inches
+<li><tt>mm</tt> - millimeters
+<li><tt>cm</tt> - centimeters
+<li><tt>pt</tt> - points (about 1/72 inch)
+<li><tt>em</tt> - approximately the width of an "M"
+ <em>in the current font</em>
+<li><tt>ex</tt> - approximately the height of an "x"
+ <em>in the current font</em>
+</ul>
+ And the following less common units
+<ul>
+<li><tt>pc</tt> - pica (12pt/pc)
+<li><tt>bp</tt> - big pt (72bp/in)
+<li><tt>dd</tt> - did&ocirc;t (1157dd=1238pt)
+<li><tt>cc</tt> - c&icirc;cero (12dd/cc)
+<li><tt>sp</tt> - scaled point (65536sp/pt)
+</ul>
+ Lengths may also be negative, for example, <tt>-1.5em</tt>.<br>
+ Note that the number <tt>0</tt> by itself is not a length;
+ it must be specified as <tt>0in</tt> or <tt>0pt</tt>, for example.<br>
+
+<h2><a name="lencmd">Length commands</a></h2>
+ A length may also be specified by a <em>length command</em>. An example
+ is <tt>\parindent</tt>
+ whose value specifies the current width of the indentation
+ which begins paragraphs. Multiples of such length commands may be specified,
+ for example by writing <tt>2.5\parindent</tt> or <tt>-0.1\parindent</tt>.
+<p>
+ Some length commands are
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\parindent</tt> - normal paragraph indentation
+<li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselineskip</tt></a> -
+ normal vertical distance between lines in a paragraph
+<ul><li><a href="baselineskip.html"><tt>\baselinestretch</tt></a> - multiplies
+ <tt>\baselineskip</tt></ul>
+<li><a href="parskip.html"><tt>\parskip</tt></a> -
+ the <strong>extra</strong> vertical space between
+ paragraphs
+<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\textwidth</tt></a> -
+ the width of text on the page
+<li><a href="textwidth.html"><tt>\linewidth</tt></a> -
+ width of a line in the <strong>local</strong>
+ environment
+<li><tt>\textheight</tt> - the height of text on the page
+<li><a href="unitlength.html"><tt>\unitlength</tt></a> - units of
+ lenght in <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture</a> Environment
+</ul>
+All length commands are robust and <strong>should not</strong> be preceded
+by a <tt>\protect</tt> command.
+
+<h2><a name="rubber">Rubber lengths</a></h2>
+Most lengths have a fixed value. However, LaTeX also allows for "rubber"
+lengths; these have a natural length plus a degree of elasticity. For
+example, the <tt>\fill</tt> length command has a natural length of zero
+but is infinitely stretchable, so that a space of width <tt>\fill</tt> will
+try to stretch as much as possible. Multiplying a rubber length by a fixed
+factor destroys its elasticity: <tt>0.5\fill</tt> becomes a rigid length
+with a value of zero.
+
+<h2>Setting values for length commands</h2>
+The following LaTeX commands define and manipulate the value of length
+commands
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-87.html"><tt>\newlength</tt></A> - define a new length command
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-89.html"><tt>\addtolength</tt></A>
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-90.html"><tt>\settowidth</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-311.html"><tt>\settoheight</tt></A>
+<li><A href="ltx-312.html"><tt>\settodepth</tt></A>
+</ul>
+
+<h2>Commands that add space</h2>
+<ul>
+<li>Horizontal space
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-238.html"><tt>\hfill</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-241.html"><tt>\hspace</tt></a>
+ </ul>
+<li>Vertical Space
+ <ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-198.html"><tt>\addvspace</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-318.html"><tt>\smallskip</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-266.html"><tt>\medskip</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-206.html"><tt>\bigskip</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-345.html"><tt>\vfill</tt></a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-347.html"><tt>\vspace</tt></a>
+ </ul>
+</ul>
+<hr>
+Back to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..d0cfcc367d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-87.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \newlength</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\newlength</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\newlength{\gnat}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\newlength</tt> command defines the mandatory argument, <tt>\gnat</tt>,
+ as a
+ length command with a value of 0in. An error occurs if a <tt>\gnat</tt>
+ command already exists.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 8 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..54623e8ddb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-88.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \setlength</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\setlength</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\setlength{len-cmd}{len}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\setlength</tt> command is used to set the value of a length command,
+ <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified as the first argument.
+ The <tt>len</tt> argument can be expressed in any terms of length LaTeX
+ understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters (mm), points (pt), etc.
+
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f6b77694576
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-89.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \addtolength</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\addtolength</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\addtolength{len-cmd}{len}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\addtolength</tt> command increments a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>,
+ <tt>len-cmd</tt>, which is specified by the first argument, by the amount
+ specified in the <tt>len</tt> argument. It can be a negative amount.
+<p>
+As an example,
+<pre>
+ <tt>\addtolength{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{-.1\parskip}</tt>
+</pre>
+decreases the value of <tt>\parskip</tt> by 10%.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ee987ef0a6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-90.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \settowidth</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\settowidth</font></h1>
+<p>
+ <tt>\settowidth{len-cmd}{text}</tt>
+<p>
+
+ The <tt>\settowidth</tt> command sets the value of a
+ <a href="ltx-86.html#lencmd">length command</a>, <tt>len-cmd</tt>,
+ which is specified as the first argument, equal to
+ the width of the <tt>text</tt> argument in the current font.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 9 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1aaa58df93a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-91.html
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Letters</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Letters</font></h1>
+ You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
+ letter document style is designed to make a number of letters at once,
+ although you can make just one if you so desire.
+<p>
+ Your *.tex source file has the same
+ <a href="input.html#structure">minimum commands</a> as the other
+ document styles, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
+ minimum:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\documentstyle{letter}
+ <a href="ltx-315.html">\signature{Your Name}</a>
+ <a href="ltx-93.html">\address{Return address}</a>
+ \begin{document}
+ ... First letter ...
+ ... Second letter ...
+ ...
+ \end{document}</tt>
+</pre>
+Note that the <tt>\address</tt> and <tt>\signature</tt> commands are
+<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> and follow the usual
+scope rules. They are generally placed in the preamble, as indicated here,
+and apply to all letters in the file.
+<p>
+ Each letter is a letter <a href="ltx-27.html">environment</a>,
+ whose argument is the name and
+ address of the recipient. For example, a typical letter might have<pre>
+ <tt>\begin{letter}{Mr. John Doe \\ 2345 Jones St.
+ \\ Oakland, CA 91123}
+ <a href="ltx-97.html">\opening{Dear John,}</a>
+ ...
+ text of letter
+ ...
+ <a href="ltx-98.html">\closing{Best regards,}</a>
+ \end{letter}</tt>
+</pre>
+ The letter itself begins with the
+ <a href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></a> command. The text of the
+ letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
+ make no sense in a letter, like <tt>\chapter,</tt> don't work. The letter
+ closes with a
+ <a href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></a> command.
+<h2>Closing matter</h2>
+ Several commands may be used after the <tt>\closing</tt> command:
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\ps{PS text}</tt> command produces a "P.S."
+<li><tt>\cc{text}</tt> command produces the usual "cc: text".
+<li><tt>\encl{list of enclosures}</tt> command produces an "encl:" list
+</ul>
+<h2>Date</h2>
+The <a href="ltx-330.html"><tt>\today</tt></a> command is used by the
+letter <a href="ltx-22.html">document style</a> to generate the date.
+If you wish a fixed date, rather than the current date, you should use<pre>
+ <tt><a href="ltx-18.html">\renewcommand</a>{\today}{Month day, year}</tt>
+</pre>
+This may be put in the preamble if it is to apply to all letters in the
+file, or just before the <tt>\opening</tt> command if it is to apply to
+just that letter.
+<hr>
+See also
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-93.html"><tt>\address</tt></a>
+<li><A href="ltx-98.html"><tt>\closing</tt></A>
+<li><a href="ltx-261.html"><tt>\location</tt></a>
+<li><A href="ltx-97.html"><tt>\opening</tt></A>
+<li><a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-323.html"><tt>\telephone</tt></a>
+</ul>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..28fcacada52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-93.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \address</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\address</font></h1>
+<tt>\address{Return address}</tt>
+<p>
+ The return address, as it should appear on the letter and the
+ envelope. Separate lines of the address should be separated by
+<a href="ltx-181.html"><tt>\\</tt></a>
+ commands. If you do not make an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the
+ letter will be formatted for copying onto your organization's
+ standard letterhead. If you give an <tt>\address</tt> declaration, then the
+ letter will be formatted as a personal letter.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 28 Apr 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..226af36881b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-97.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \opening</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\opening</font></h1>
+ <tt>\opening{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The letter begins with the <tt>\opening</tt> command. The mandatory argument,
+ <tt>text</tt>, is what ever text you wish to start your letter, for example:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\opening{Dear John,}</tt>
+</pre>
+</body>
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e505cb235b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-98.html
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \closing</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\closing</font></h1>
+ <tt>\closing{text}</tt>
+<p>
+ The letter closes with a <tt>\closing</tt> command, where the
+mandatory argument, <tt>text</tt> is the desired text, for example:
+<pre>
+ <tt>\closing{Sincerely yours,}</tt>
+</pre>
+The signature will be taken from the
+<a href="ltx-315.html"><tt>\signature</tt></a> declaration.
+<hr>
+See <a href="ltx-91.html">Letters</a><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 24 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c83b00674c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-99.html
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX Line and Page Breaking</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Line and Page Breaking</font></h1>
+ The first thing LaTeX does when processing ordinary text is to
+ translate your input file into a string of glyphs and spaces. To
+ produce a printed document, this string must be broken into lines, and
+ these lines must be broken into pages. In some environments, you do
+ the line breaking yourself with the <tt>\\</tt> command, but LaTeX usually does
+ it for you.
+
+<H2>Commands for line and page breaks</H2>
+<ul>
+<li><A href="ltx-181.html">\\</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-182.html">\-</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-244.html">\hyphenation</A>
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-212.html">\cleardoublepage</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-213.html">\clearpage</A>
+<p>
+<li><A href="ltx-275.html">\newline</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-258.html">\linebreak</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-281.html">\nolinebreak</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-276.html">\newpage</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-289.html">\pagebreak</A>
+<li><A href="ltx-283.html">\nopagebreak</A>
+</ul>
+
+</body>
+<hr>
+For page numbering, see <a href="ltx-3.html">Counters</a><br>
+To refer to a page number in the text, see
+ <a href="ltx-291.html"><tt>\pageref</tt></a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 20 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ddb8132efbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/ltx-tar.html
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Hypertext LaTeX Help files</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
+text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Hypertext LaTeX Help files</font></h1>
+
+<p>If you find Hypertext Help with LaTeX to be useful, you are welcome to
+obtain the complete set of files and install them on your own machine.
+Retrieval and installation instructions are given below.
+They may be installed for use either with a webserver, which
+will ease network traffic and probably give you faster access,
+or they may be installed as local files which may be "read"
+with an HTML viewer, such as Mosaic, Cello, Lynx, Netscape, etc.
+without the necessity of a network connection.</p>
+
+<p>To facilitate off-network usage,
+the files generally have only local (within the same directory) hypertext
+links. All links to "external" URLs, including much LaTeX information
+available on the Web, have been restricted to one file in this set other than
+the current one.</p>
+
+<p>Although it is not required, if you make these files available on a public
+Web server, please send a note to
+<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a>
+so that we can add you to the list of
+<a href="mirror.html">mirror sites</a>.</p>
+
+
+<hr>
+
+<p>The files are available via anonymous ftp as a
+<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.Z">Unix-compressed
+tar file</a> (about 125 KByte) or
+<a href="ftp://ftp.giss.nasa.gov/pub/sgreen/latex/latex.tar.gz">gzipped
+tar file</a> (about 85 KByte).
+Your Web browser can probably retrieve the files via the above link, or they
+can be retrieved by anonymous ftp to ftp.giss.nasa.gov.
+Login as anonymous and give your e-mail address as the password,
+then switch to binary mode and download the file by issuing the
+commands:</p>
+
+<pre>
+ bin
+ cd pub/sgreen/latex
+ get filename.tar.Z
+</pre>
+
+<p>or</p>
+
+<pre>
+ bin
+ cd pub/sgreen/latex
+ get filename.tar.gz
+</pre>
+
+<p>After downloading the file on your local machine, issue the
+Unix commands:</p>
+
+<pre>
+ uncompress filename.tar.Z
+ tar -xf filename.tar
+</pre>
+
+or
+
+<pre>
+ gunzip filename.tar.gz
+ tar -xf filename.tar
+</pre>
+
+
+<p>(Note: some Web software, such as Mosaic, will automatically
+uncompress the file after retrieving it, in which case save it as
+<code>filename.tar</code> and execute only the <code>tar -xf</code>
+line above.) This will create a subdirectory named
+<code>latex</code> in your current directory which contains the complete
+set of html files and which requires about 1 MByte of disk space.
+The "Introduction" file is <code>index.html</code> and the Table of
+Contents page is <code>ltx-2.html</code>. </p>
+
+<p>You may rename or move the entire <code>latex</code> subdirectory
+if desired; all file references are local to this directory so links
+should continue to work.</p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="index.html">Back to the Introduction</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-2.html">On to the Table of Contents</a>
+</ul>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Page revised: 1998-05-21, RBS
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e5b78af08ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mathfonts.html
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX math fonts and styles</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">Math fonts and styles</font></h1>
+
+<h2>Math styles</h2>
+The following applies to both LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e.
+<p>
+There are four styles used in typesetting <a href="ltx-115.html">math
+formulas</a> which affect the size and certain formatting parameters
+(notably the placement of sub and superscripts on <a href="ltx-408.html">
+variable size symbols</a>).
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\textstyle</tt> - default in the running text and in
+ <a href="ltx-202.html">array</a> environment
+<li><tt>\displaystyle</tt> - default for displayed equations
+<li><tt>\scriptstyle</tt> - default for first-level sub and superscripts
+<li><tt>\scriptscriptstyle</tt> - default for higher-level sub and superscripts
+</ul>
+All four of these may be used in math mode as
+<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> to <strong>force</strong> the
+type size and formatting to a style other than what would normally be used.
+<p>
+For example, to get a superscript that is the same size as the running text:
+<pre> <tt>$e^{\textstyle -E/kT}</tt>$ </pre>
+<p>
+As another example, the limits on a summation symbol are normally placed
+below and above the symbol in <tt>display</tt> style and in normal sub and
+superscript position in <tt>textstyle</tt>. One could <strong>force</strong>
+the below/above placement in running text by using:
+<pre> <tt>\displaystyle $<a href="ltx-408.html">\sum</a>_{n=0}^<a href="ltx-407.html">\infty</a> x_n$</tt></pre>
+although it should be noted that this might cause LaTeX to leave extra
+space between the text lines which might not be desirable.
+
+<h2>LaTeX 2.09 fonts</h2>
+The regular <a href="ltx-177.html">type style</a> declarations can be
+used in <a href="ltx-115.html#math">math mode</a>.
+They affect only letters (including upper case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a>
+letters) but not symbols
+(or lower case <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a> letters). Two additional style
+<a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> which can be used
+<strong>only</strong> in math mode are
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\mit</tt>
+<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\cal</a></tt>
+</ul>
+The former is math italic style; it spaces letters as if they were words,
+however, not as if they were each separate math symbols.
+The latter produces upper case calligraphic letters.
+
+<h2>LaTeX2e math fonts</h2>
+The following <a href="declarations.html">declarations</a> change the style
+only of letters, numbers, and uppercase <a href="ltx-405.html">Greek</a>.
+<ul>
+<li><tt>\mathit</tt> - same as <tt>\mit</tt> in 2.09 (see above)
+<li><tt>\mathrm</tt> - Roman
+<li><tt>\mathbf</tt> - Bold face
+<li><tt>\mathsf</tt> - San Serif
+<li><tt>\mathtt</tt> - Typewriter style
+<li><tt><a href="ltx-407.html">\mathcal</a></tt> - Calligraphic
+</ul>
+All of these produce spacing appropriate for text; they do not interpret each
+letter as a separate math symbol.
+<p>
+The <a href="boldmath.html"><tt>\boldmath</tt></a> declaration causes
+everything (including symbols) in a formula to be in a bold font.
+Note that this differs somewhat from the same declaration in 2.09 which
+did not affect some symbols.
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-176.html">Typefaces</a>
+ <ul><li><a href="ltx-177.html">Styles</a>
+ <li><a href="ltx-178.html">Sizes</a>
+ <li><a href="fonts2e.html">LaTeX2e fonts</a>
+ </ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-408.html">Variable size symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-407.html">Miscellaneous symbols</a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 2 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fd87330c1bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/mirror.html
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Hypertext Help with LaTeX - Mirror Sites</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>
+<font color="#cc0000">Mirror Sites</font></h1>
+
+<p>Copies of <strong>Hypertext Help with LaTeX</strong> are available
+from several other Web sites which might provide faster access depending
+on your location.
+However, these files may not be quite as up-to-date as the original files at
+<a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute for
+Space Studies, New York, NY, USA</a>.</p>
+
+<p>The following mirror sites were last verified on December 3, 1998.
+Please contact
+<a href="mailto:webmaster@giss.nasa.gov">webmaster@giss.nasa.gov</a>
+if you discover that one of these sites is no longer available or
+if you know of additional sites that should be listed.</p>
+
+
+<dl>
+
+<dt><b>Australia</b>
+<dd><a href="http://ecco.bsee.swin.edu.au/text/hyperlatex/">Swinburne
+ University of Technology</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Brazil</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.cos.ufrj.br/~gabriel/latex/">Universidade Federal
+ do Rio de Janeiro</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Canada</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.cs.ualberta.ca/~vladimir/latex/">Dept. Of Computing
+ Science, University of Alberta</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dd><a href="http://sault.qucis.queensu.ca/wright/latex/">Dept. Of Computing
+ and Information Science, Queen's University</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Chile</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.dim.uchile.cl/documents/giss-latex/">Departamento
+ de Ingenier&#237;a Matem&#225;tica, Universidad de Chile</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Denmark</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.astro.ku.dk/help/LaTeX/">Niels Bohr Institute for
+ Astronomy, Physics and Geophysics, University of Copenhagen</a>
+ <small>(May 1995 copy)</small>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Germany</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www-ti.informatik.uni-tuebingen.de/~frech/latex/">Arbeitsbereich
+ Technische Informatik, University of T&#252;bingen</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>India</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.aero.iitm.ernet.in/dcf/LaTeX/">Indian Institute
+ of Technology, Madras</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Ireland</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.eeng.dcu.ie/local-docs/latex-help/">School of
+ Electonic Engineering, Dublin City University</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<!-- not responding 19981203
+<dt><b>Mexico</b>
+<dd><a href="http://ixmati.uam.mx/comp/LaTeX/LaTeXHelp">UAM-Iztapalapa</a>
+-->
+
+<!-- not responding 19981203
+<dt><b>Netherlands</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.fys.ruu.nl/~fange/LaTeX/">Universiteit Utrecht</a>
+-->
+
+<dt><b>Norway</b>
+<dd><a href="http://mitra.phys.uit.no/edb/latex/">University of
+ Troms&#248;</a>
+ <small>(May 1995 copy)</small>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Poland</b>
+<dd><a href="http://zon8.physd.amu.edu.pl/LaTeX/">Institute of Physics,
+ Adam Mickiewicz University</a>
+ <small>(November 1995 copy)</small>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Portugal</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.astro.up.pt/LaTeX/">Center for Astrophysics,
+ University of Porto</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Russia</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.izmiran.rssi.ru/doc/latex/">Institute of
+ Terrestrial Magnetism, Ionosphere and Radiowave Propagation</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Sweden</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.ce.chalmers.se/~case/Help/LaTeX/">Dept.
+ of Computer Engineering, Chalmers University of Technology</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>Switzerland</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.ee.ethz.ch/isg/tardis/soft/latex/green/">Dept.
+ of Electrical Engineering, Federal Institute of Technology</a>
+ <!-- verified 19981203 -->
+
+<dt><b>United States</b>
+<dd><a href="http://www.giss.nasa.gov/latex/">NASA Goddard Institute
+ for Space Studies</a>
+
+</dl>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Page revised: 1998-12-03, RBS
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0f22ae706d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/parskip.html
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \parskip</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
+text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\parskip</font></h1>
+<tt>\parskip</tt> is the extra vertical space inserted before a
+paragraph. It has a natural length of zero but should be a
+<a href="ltx-86.html#rubber">rubber length</a> so that it may
+be stretched in a
+<a href="ltx-227.html">flushbottom</a> environment.
+<p>
+To increase <tt>\parskip</tt> to skip a line between paragraphs one
+could use
+<pre>
+ <tt><a href="ltx-89.html">\addtolength</a>{<a href="parskip.html">\parskip</a>}{<a href="baselineskip.html">\baselineskip}</a></tt>
+</pre>
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Oct 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b8d15e4f741
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/refs.html
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>LaTeX Reference Books</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">LaTeX Reference Books</font></h1>
+
+
+<p The standard reference source for LaTeX is
+<cite>A Document Preparation System: LaTeX</cite>,
+by Leslie Lamport, ISBN 0-201-52983-1, published
+jointly by the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley
+Publishing Company. The 2nd edition, 1994, describes LaTeX2e, the
+second widely distributed version of LaTeX. The first edition of this
+book, which appeared in 1985, described LaTeX 2.09.</p>
+
+<p>The standard reference for what goes on inside TeX is
+<cite>The TeXbook</cite>
+by Donald E. Knuth, ISBN 0-201-13448-9, published jointly by
+the American Mathematical Society and Addison-Wesley.</p>
+
+<p>M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin,
+<cite>The LaTeX Companion</cite>, published
+by Addison-Wesley, ISBN 0-201-54199-8 (essential for the serious
+LaTeX hackers).</p>
+
+<p>L. Botway and C. Biemesderfer,
+<cite>LaTeX Command Summary</cite>, published by
+the TeX Users Group, Providence, RI is a good companion.</p>
+
+<p>A. Diller,
+<cite>LaTeX Line by Line</cite>, published by Wiley.</p>
+
+<p>N. Walsh,
+<cite><a href="http://www.ora.com/catalog/tex/">Making TeX Work</a></cite>,
+published by O'Reilly &amp; Associates, ISBN 1-56592-051-1.</p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<p>Other information is available <a href="externals.html">on the Web</a>.</p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<p>Back to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br>
+Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a></p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Revised: RBS, 20 February 1997<br>
+Thanks to Anthony Stone (Cambridge) for suggestions.
+</address>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1ae9cb1bc03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/stackrel.html
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \stackrel and \mathop</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\stackrel</font></h1>
+<p>
+This can be used to stack something above something else; used in math mode.
+<pre>
+ <tt>\stackrel{top}{bot}</tt>
+</pre>
+The first argument, <tt>top</tt>, is typset immediately above the
+second argument, <tt>bot</tt>; the former is set in the same
+math style as a superscript.
+<p>
+For example
+<pre>
+ <tt>H$_2$CO$_3$ $\stackrel{<a href="ltx-304.html">\rm</a> heat}
+ {<a href="ltx-406.html">\longrightarrow}</a>$ H$_2$O + CO$_2$</tt>
+</pre>
+will produce something like
+<pre><tt>
+ heat
+ H CO ------> H O + CO
+ 2 3 2 2
+</tt></pre>
+Note that the the <a href="ltx-304.html"><tt>\rm</tt></a> declaration is used
+so that "heat" is set in Roman face and not math italics.
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>a name="mathop">\mathop</a></h1>
+This command does not seem to be well documented but appears to work,
+at least in current versions of LaTeX 2.09.
+<p>
+The argument is considered to be a single <a href="ltx-408.html">variable
+sized math symbol</a> for purposes of placing limits below
+(<a href="ltx-179.html">subscripts</a>) and above
+(<a href="ltx-180.html">superscripts</a>) in
+<a href="mathfonts.html">display math</a> style. For example,
+<pre>
+ <tt>\mathop{\sum \sum}_{i,j=1}^{N} a_i a_j</tt>
+</pre>
+would produce something like
+<pre>
+ N
+ --- ---
+ \ \
+ / / a a
+ --- --- i j
+ i,j
+</pre>
+It is possible to create <strong>two rows</strong> of "subscripts" by using
+a similar construction: The first row is created as subscripts of the symbol
+in the usual way and a lower row is created by placing this whole construct
+as the argument of a <tt>\mathop</tt> command with its own subscript. For
+example
+<pre>
+ <tt>\mathop{\sum_{i,j=1}^{N}}_{i&gt;j}</tt>
+</pre>
+would produce something like
+<pre>
+ N
+ ---
+ \
+ /
+ ---
+ i,j=1
+ i&gt;j
+</pre>
+
+<hr>
+Related topics
+<ul>
+<li><a href="ltx-115.html">Math Formulas</a>
+ and <a href="ltx-117.html">Math Symbols</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-406.html">Arrows</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-404.html">Binary and relational opertors</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-223.html">Eqnarray Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-224.html">Equation Environment</a>
+<li><a href="ltx-421.html">Displaymath Environment</a>
+<li><a href="mathfonts.html">Math Fonts and Styles</a>
+<p>
+<li><a href="ltx-287.html"><tt>\overbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-288.html"><tt>\overline</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-335.html"><tt>\underbrace</tt></a>
+<li><a href="ltx-336.html"><tt>\underline</tt></a>
+</ul>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 15 Aug 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..912c11d74be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/textwidth.html
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \textwidth \linewidth</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\textwidth \linewidth</font></h1>
+<tt>\textwidth</tt> is the normal width of the text on a page. It should
+generally be changed only in the <a href="input.html#structure">preamble</a>.
+<p>
+<tt>\linewidth</tt> is the width of lines in the current environment. Normally
+equal to <tt>\textwidth</tt>, it may be different within an environment such
+as <a href="lists.html">list</a> or
+<a href="ltx-298.html">quote</a> environments.
+<hr>
+See also: <A href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</A><br>
+Return to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 23 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5f975e1a36f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/toc.html
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \tableofcontents</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\tableofcontents</font></h1>
+<p>
+ A table of contents is produced with the
+ <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command. You
+ put the command right where you want the table of contents to go;
+ LaTeX does the rest for you.
+ Entries are taken from the <a href="ltx-141.html">Sectioning</a> commands.
+<p>
+ <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> produces a heading, but it does not
+ automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the
+ table of contents, include a
+ <a href="ltx-276.html"><tt>\newpage</tt></a> command after the
+ <tt>\tableofcontents</tt> command.
+<p>
+<hr>
+See also <a href="ltx-170.html">Table of Contents</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 5 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e73e8d4ba85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/trivlist.html
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX trivlist</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">trivlist</font></h1>
+<p>
+<p><pre>
+ <tt>\begin{trivlist}
+ \item First item
+ ....
+ \end{trivlist}</tt>
+</pre>
+This is ike the <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>, but
+uses the currently defined values of
+list-making parameters. It is normally used to define an environment with a
+single item, with an <a href="item.html"><tt>\item</tt></a> command
+as part of the environment definition.
+<hr>
+See <a href="lists.html">Lists</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-260.html">List Environment</a>,
+ <a href="ltx-27.html">Environments</a><br>
+Back to the <a href="ltx-2.html">Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 1 Jun 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
+
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f1bd14691d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/unitlength.html
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+<html>
+<head><title>Help On LaTeX \unitlength</title></head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff" text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br><font color="#cc0000">\unitlength</font></h1>
+ <tt>\unitlength</tt>
+<p>
+ The <tt>\unitlength</tt> command is a <a href="ltx-86.html">Length
+ command</a>. It defines the units used in the
+ <a href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</a>
+<p>
+The default value is 1 point (approximately 1/72 inch) but it may
+be changed using the <a href="ltx-88.html"><tt>\setlength</tt></a>
+command.
+<hr>
+See also <A href="ltx-27.html">Environments</A>,
+ <A href="ltx-43.html">Picture Environment</A><br>
+See also <a href="ltx-86.html">Lengths</a><br>
+Return to <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a>
+<hr>
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 12 May 1995.
+</address>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..922e5070f98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-doc/doc/english/latex2e-html/versions.html
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</title>
+</head>
+<body bgcolor="#ffffff"
+text="#000000" link="#000099" vlink="#cc0000" alink="#cc0000">
+
+<h1><font size="-2">Hypertext Help with LaTeX</font><br>
+<font color="#cc0000">LaTeX 2.09 and LaTeX2e</font></h1>
+
+<p>The following information is excerpted from "A Document Preparation System:
+LaTeX" by Leslie Lamport, 2nd edition and/or "LaTeX2e for authors",
+by the LaTeX3 Project Team, June 1994.</p>
+
+<p>LaTex2e was produced in an attempt to reconcile the various, sometimes
+incompatble, "flavors" of LaTeX which were developing. Some of these
+included the New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS), SLITeX (for slides),
+AASTeX (the American Astronomical Society macros), etc. The major
+change to LaTeX2e is the method for trying to make the use of add-on
+packages more uniform by the introduction of "classes"
+and "packages." Most of the new commands are the "initial" commands,
+i.e., those which can appear only <em>before</em> the
+<tt>\documentclass</tt> command.</p>
+
+<p>A few standard LaTeX commands have been modified and a few new commands
+added, notably:</p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="ltx-18.html"><tt>\newcommand</tt></a> (and related) commands,
+ which now allow for an optional argument in newly defined commands
+ <li><a href="ensuremath.html"><tt>\ensuremath</tt></a>
+</ul>
+
+
+<h2>Document Styles and Style Options</h2>
+
+<p>In LaTeX2e, documents begin with a <tt>\documentclass</tt> command. This
+replaces the LaTeX 2.09
+<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command. The
+<tt>\usepackage</tt> command has been added and is used in conjunction
+with <tt>\documentclass</tt>.</p>
+
+<p> aTeX2e still understands the old
+<a href="ltx-22.html"><tt>\documentstyle</tt></a> command; if it is
+encountered, LaTex2e enters <em>compatibility
+mode</em> in which most 2.09 input files should still be processed properly.</p>
+
+
+<h2>Type Styles and Sizes</h2>
+
+<p>LaTeX 2.09 commands for changing type style, for example, <tt>\tt</tt>,
+still work similarly in LaTeX2e.
+The major difference is that <tt>\sc</tt> and <tt>\sl</tt>
+can no longer be used in math mode (except when LaTeX2e is in
+<em>compatibility mode</em>, see above).</p>
+
+<p>However, <a href="fonts2e.html">a new set of commands</a>
+have been added to allow separate (and independent) specification of </p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li>Shape
+ <li>Series
+ <li>Family
+</ul>
+
+<p>These can be combined to form a wide variety of type styles. If a style
+you specify is not available on your computer, LaTeX2e produce a warning
+message and will substitute a style it thinks is similar.</p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<p>Return to the <a href="index.html">Introduction</a><br>
+Go to the <a href="ltx-2.html">LaTeX Table of Contents</a></p>
+
+<hr>
+
+<address>
+Revised: Sheldon Green, 14 May 1995.
+</address>
+
+
+</body>
+</html>